extensions/sqlite/sqlite-source/vdbe.c
author David Anderson <dvander@alliedmods.net>
Sun Jul 29 01:15:31 2007 +0000 (2007-07-29)
changeset 1203 633c25ce6405
child 1645 27307df4d711
permissions -rw-r--r--
initial import of sqlite extension
dvander@1203
     1
/*
dvander@1203
     2
** 2001 September 15
dvander@1203
     3
**
dvander@1203
     4
** The author disclaims copyright to this source code.  In place of
dvander@1203
     5
** a legal notice, here is a blessing:
dvander@1203
     6
**
dvander@1203
     7
**    May you do good and not evil.
dvander@1203
     8
**    May you find forgiveness for yourself and forgive others.
dvander@1203
     9
**    May you share freely, never taking more than you give.
dvander@1203
    10
**
dvander@1203
    11
*************************************************************************
dvander@1203
    12
** The code in this file implements execution method of the 
dvander@1203
    13
** Virtual Database Engine (VDBE).  A separate file ("vdbeaux.c")
dvander@1203
    14
** handles housekeeping details such as creating and deleting
dvander@1203
    15
** VDBE instances.  This file is solely interested in executing
dvander@1203
    16
** the VDBE program.
dvander@1203
    17
**
dvander@1203
    18
** In the external interface, an "sqlite3_stmt*" is an opaque pointer
dvander@1203
    19
** to a VDBE.
dvander@1203
    20
**
dvander@1203
    21
** The SQL parser generates a program which is then executed by
dvander@1203
    22
** the VDBE to do the work of the SQL statement.  VDBE programs are 
dvander@1203
    23
** similar in form to assembly language.  The program consists of
dvander@1203
    24
** a linear sequence of operations.  Each operation has an opcode 
dvander@1203
    25
** and 3 operands.  Operands P1 and P2 are integers.  Operand P3 
dvander@1203
    26
** is a null-terminated string.   The P2 operand must be non-negative.
dvander@1203
    27
** Opcodes will typically ignore one or more operands.  Many opcodes
dvander@1203
    28
** ignore all three operands.
dvander@1203
    29
**
dvander@1203
    30
** Computation results are stored on a stack.  Each entry on the
dvander@1203
    31
** stack is either an integer, a null-terminated string, a floating point
dvander@1203
    32
** number, or the SQL "NULL" value.  An inplicit conversion from one
dvander@1203
    33
** type to the other occurs as necessary.
dvander@1203
    34
** 
dvander@1203
    35
** Most of the code in this file is taken up by the sqlite3VdbeExec()
dvander@1203
    36
** function which does the work of interpreting a VDBE program.
dvander@1203
    37
** But other routines are also provided to help in building up
dvander@1203
    38
** a program instruction by instruction.
dvander@1203
    39
**
dvander@1203
    40
** Various scripts scan this source file in order to generate HTML
dvander@1203
    41
** documentation, headers files, or other derived files.  The formatting
dvander@1203
    42
** of the code in this file is, therefore, important.  See other comments
dvander@1203
    43
** in this file for details.  If in doubt, do not deviate from existing
dvander@1203
    44
** commenting and indentation practices when changing or adding code.
dvander@1203
    45
**
dvander@1203
    46
** $Id$
dvander@1203
    47
*/
dvander@1203
    48
#include "sqliteInt.h"
dvander@1203
    49
#include "os.h"
dvander@1203
    50
#include <ctype.h>
dvander@1203
    51
#include <math.h>
dvander@1203
    52
#include "vdbeInt.h"
dvander@1203
    53
dvander@1203
    54
/*
dvander@1203
    55
** The following global variable is incremented every time a cursor
dvander@1203
    56
** moves, either by the OP_MoveXX, OP_Next, or OP_Prev opcodes.  The test
dvander@1203
    57
** procedures use this information to make sure that indices are
dvander@1203
    58
** working correctly.  This variable has no function other than to
dvander@1203
    59
** help verify the correct operation of the library.
dvander@1203
    60
*/
dvander@1203
    61
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
    62
int sqlite3_search_count = 0;
dvander@1203
    63
#endif
dvander@1203
    64
dvander@1203
    65
/*
dvander@1203
    66
** When this global variable is positive, it gets decremented once before
dvander@1203
    67
** each instruction in the VDBE.  When reaches zero, the u1.isInterrupted
dvander@1203
    68
** field of the sqlite3 structure is set in order to simulate and interrupt.
dvander@1203
    69
**
dvander@1203
    70
** This facility is used for testing purposes only.  It does not function
dvander@1203
    71
** in an ordinary build.
dvander@1203
    72
*/
dvander@1203
    73
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
    74
int sqlite3_interrupt_count = 0;
dvander@1203
    75
#endif
dvander@1203
    76
dvander@1203
    77
/*
dvander@1203
    78
** The next global variable is incremented each type the OP_Sort opcode
dvander@1203
    79
** is executed.  The test procedures use this information to make sure that
dvander@1203
    80
** sorting is occurring or not occuring at appropriate times.   This variable
dvander@1203
    81
** has no function other than to help verify the correct operation of the
dvander@1203
    82
** library.
dvander@1203
    83
*/
dvander@1203
    84
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
    85
int sqlite3_sort_count = 0;
dvander@1203
    86
#endif
dvander@1203
    87
dvander@1203
    88
/*
dvander@1203
    89
** The next global variable records the size of the largest MEM_Blob
dvander@1203
    90
** or MEM_Str that has appeared on the VDBE stack.  The test procedures
dvander@1203
    91
** use this information to make sure that the zero-blob functionality
dvander@1203
    92
** is working correctly.   This variable has no function other than to
dvander@1203
    93
** help verify the correct operation of the library.
dvander@1203
    94
*/
dvander@1203
    95
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
    96
int sqlite3_max_blobsize = 0;
dvander@1203
    97
#endif
dvander@1203
    98
dvander@1203
    99
/*
dvander@1203
   100
** Release the memory associated with the given stack level.  This
dvander@1203
   101
** leaves the Mem.flags field in an inconsistent state.
dvander@1203
   102
*/
dvander@1203
   103
#define Release(P) if((P)->flags&MEM_Dyn){ sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(P); }
dvander@1203
   104
dvander@1203
   105
/*
dvander@1203
   106
** Convert the given stack entity into a string if it isn't one
dvander@1203
   107
** already. Return non-zero if a malloc() fails.
dvander@1203
   108
*/
dvander@1203
   109
#define Stringify(P, enc) \
dvander@1203
   110
   if(((P)->flags&(MEM_Str|MEM_Blob))==0 && sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(P,enc)) \
dvander@1203
   111
     { goto no_mem; }
dvander@1203
   112
dvander@1203
   113
/*
dvander@1203
   114
** Convert the given stack entity into a string that has been obtained
dvander@1203
   115
** from sqliteMalloc().  This is different from Stringify() above in that
dvander@1203
   116
** Stringify() will use the NBFS bytes of static string space if the string
dvander@1203
   117
** will fit but this routine always mallocs for space.
dvander@1203
   118
** Return non-zero if we run out of memory.
dvander@1203
   119
*/
dvander@1203
   120
#define Dynamicify(P,enc) sqlite3VdbeMemDynamicify(P)
dvander@1203
   121
dvander@1203
   122
/*
dvander@1203
   123
** The header of a record consists of a sequence variable-length integers.
dvander@1203
   124
** These integers are almost always small and are encoded as a single byte.
dvander@1203
   125
** The following macro takes advantage this fact to provide a fast decode
dvander@1203
   126
** of the integers in a record header.  It is faster for the common case
dvander@1203
   127
** where the integer is a single byte.  It is a little slower when the
dvander@1203
   128
** integer is two or more bytes.  But overall it is faster.
dvander@1203
   129
**
dvander@1203
   130
** The following expressions are equivalent:
dvander@1203
   131
**
dvander@1203
   132
**     x = sqlite3GetVarint32( A, &B );
dvander@1203
   133
**
dvander@1203
   134
**     x = GetVarint( A, B );
dvander@1203
   135
**
dvander@1203
   136
*/
dvander@1203
   137
#define GetVarint(A,B)  ((B = *(A))<=0x7f ? 1 : sqlite3GetVarint32(A, &B))
dvander@1203
   138
dvander@1203
   139
/*
dvander@1203
   140
** An ephemeral string value (signified by the MEM_Ephem flag) contains
dvander@1203
   141
** a pointer to a dynamically allocated string where some other entity
dvander@1203
   142
** is responsible for deallocating that string.  Because the stack entry
dvander@1203
   143
** does not control the string, it might be deleted without the stack
dvander@1203
   144
** entry knowing it.
dvander@1203
   145
**
dvander@1203
   146
** This routine converts an ephemeral string into a dynamically allocated
dvander@1203
   147
** string that the stack entry itself controls.  In other words, it
dvander@1203
   148
** converts an MEM_Ephem string into an MEM_Dyn string.
dvander@1203
   149
*/
dvander@1203
   150
#define Deephemeralize(P) \
dvander@1203
   151
   if( ((P)->flags&MEM_Ephem)!=0 \
dvander@1203
   152
       && sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(P) ){ goto no_mem;}
dvander@1203
   153
dvander@1203
   154
/*
dvander@1203
   155
** Call sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob() on the supplied value (type Mem*)
dvander@1203
   156
** P if required.
dvander@1203
   157
*/
dvander@1203
   158
#define ExpandBlob(P) (((P)->flags&MEM_Zero)?sqlite3VdbeMemExpandBlob(P):0)
dvander@1203
   159
dvander@1203
   160
/*
dvander@1203
   161
** Argument pMem points at a memory cell that will be passed to a
dvander@1203
   162
** user-defined function or returned to the user as the result of a query.
dvander@1203
   163
** The second argument, 'db_enc' is the text encoding used by the vdbe for
dvander@1203
   164
** stack variables.  This routine sets the pMem->enc and pMem->type
dvander@1203
   165
** variables used by the sqlite3_value_*() routines.
dvander@1203
   166
*/
dvander@1203
   167
#define storeTypeInfo(A,B) _storeTypeInfo(A)
dvander@1203
   168
static void _storeTypeInfo(Mem *pMem){
dvander@1203
   169
  int flags = pMem->flags;
dvander@1203
   170
  if( flags & MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
   171
    pMem->type = SQLITE_NULL;
dvander@1203
   172
  }
dvander@1203
   173
  else if( flags & MEM_Int ){
dvander@1203
   174
    pMem->type = SQLITE_INTEGER;
dvander@1203
   175
  }
dvander@1203
   176
  else if( flags & MEM_Real ){
dvander@1203
   177
    pMem->type = SQLITE_FLOAT;
dvander@1203
   178
  }
dvander@1203
   179
  else if( flags & MEM_Str ){
dvander@1203
   180
    pMem->type = SQLITE_TEXT;
dvander@1203
   181
  }else{
dvander@1203
   182
    pMem->type = SQLITE_BLOB;
dvander@1203
   183
  }
dvander@1203
   184
}
dvander@1203
   185
dvander@1203
   186
/*
dvander@1203
   187
** Pop the stack N times.
dvander@1203
   188
*/
dvander@1203
   189
static void popStack(Mem **ppTos, int N){
dvander@1203
   190
  Mem *pTos = *ppTos;
dvander@1203
   191
  while( N>0 ){
dvander@1203
   192
    N--;
dvander@1203
   193
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
   194
    pTos--;
dvander@1203
   195
  }
dvander@1203
   196
  *ppTos = pTos;
dvander@1203
   197
}
dvander@1203
   198
dvander@1203
   199
/*
dvander@1203
   200
** Allocate cursor number iCur.  Return a pointer to it.  Return NULL
dvander@1203
   201
** if we run out of memory.
dvander@1203
   202
*/
dvander@1203
   203
static Cursor *allocateCursor(Vdbe *p, int iCur, int iDb){
dvander@1203
   204
  Cursor *pCx;
dvander@1203
   205
  assert( iCur<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
   206
  if( p->apCsr[iCur] ){
dvander@1203
   207
    sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[iCur]);
dvander@1203
   208
  }
dvander@1203
   209
  p->apCsr[iCur] = pCx = sqliteMalloc( sizeof(Cursor) );
dvander@1203
   210
  if( pCx ){
dvander@1203
   211
    pCx->iDb = iDb;
dvander@1203
   212
  }
dvander@1203
   213
  return pCx;
dvander@1203
   214
}
dvander@1203
   215
dvander@1203
   216
/*
dvander@1203
   217
** Try to convert a value into a numeric representation if we can
dvander@1203
   218
** do so without loss of information.  In other words, if the string
dvander@1203
   219
** looks like a number, convert it into a number.  If it does not
dvander@1203
   220
** look like a number, leave it alone.
dvander@1203
   221
*/
dvander@1203
   222
static void applyNumericAffinity(Mem *pRec){
dvander@1203
   223
  if( (pRec->flags & (MEM_Real|MEM_Int))==0 ){
dvander@1203
   224
    int realnum;
dvander@1203
   225
    sqlite3VdbeMemNulTerminate(pRec);
dvander@1203
   226
    if( (pRec->flags&MEM_Str)
dvander@1203
   227
         && sqlite3IsNumber(pRec->z, &realnum, pRec->enc) ){
dvander@1203
   228
      i64 value;
dvander@1203
   229
      sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pRec, SQLITE_UTF8);
dvander@1203
   230
      if( !realnum && sqlite3Atoi64(pRec->z, &value) ){
dvander@1203
   231
        sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(pRec);
dvander@1203
   232
        pRec->u.i = value;
dvander@1203
   233
        pRec->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
   234
      }else{
dvander@1203
   235
        sqlite3VdbeMemRealify(pRec);
dvander@1203
   236
      }
dvander@1203
   237
    }
dvander@1203
   238
  }
dvander@1203
   239
}
dvander@1203
   240
dvander@1203
   241
/*
dvander@1203
   242
** Processing is determine by the affinity parameter:
dvander@1203
   243
**
dvander@1203
   244
** SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER:
dvander@1203
   245
** SQLITE_AFF_REAL:
dvander@1203
   246
** SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC:
dvander@1203
   247
**    Try to convert pRec to an integer representation or a 
dvander@1203
   248
**    floating-point representation if an integer representation
dvander@1203
   249
**    is not possible.  Note that the integer representation is
dvander@1203
   250
**    always preferred, even if the affinity is REAL, because
dvander@1203
   251
**    an integer representation is more space efficient on disk.
dvander@1203
   252
**
dvander@1203
   253
** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT:
dvander@1203
   254
**    Convert pRec to a text representation.
dvander@1203
   255
**
dvander@1203
   256
** SQLITE_AFF_NONE:
dvander@1203
   257
**    No-op.  pRec is unchanged.
dvander@1203
   258
*/
dvander@1203
   259
static void applyAffinity(Mem *pRec, char affinity, u8 enc){
dvander@1203
   260
  if( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_TEXT ){
dvander@1203
   261
    /* Only attempt the conversion to TEXT if there is an integer or real
dvander@1203
   262
    ** representation (blob and NULL do not get converted) but no string
dvander@1203
   263
    ** representation.
dvander@1203
   264
    */
dvander@1203
   265
    if( 0==(pRec->flags&MEM_Str) && (pRec->flags&(MEM_Real|MEM_Int)) ){
dvander@1203
   266
      sqlite3VdbeMemStringify(pRec, enc);
dvander@1203
   267
    }
dvander@1203
   268
    pRec->flags &= ~(MEM_Real|MEM_Int);
dvander@1203
   269
  }else if( affinity!=SQLITE_AFF_NONE ){
dvander@1203
   270
    assert( affinity==SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_REAL
dvander@1203
   271
             || affinity==SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC );
dvander@1203
   272
    applyNumericAffinity(pRec);
dvander@1203
   273
    if( pRec->flags & MEM_Real ){
dvander@1203
   274
      sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pRec);
dvander@1203
   275
    }
dvander@1203
   276
  }
dvander@1203
   277
}
dvander@1203
   278
dvander@1203
   279
/*
dvander@1203
   280
** Try to convert the type of a function argument or a result column
dvander@1203
   281
** into a numeric representation.  Use either INTEGER or REAL whichever
dvander@1203
   282
** is appropriate.  But only do the conversion if it is possible without
dvander@1203
   283
** loss of information and return the revised type of the argument.
dvander@1203
   284
**
dvander@1203
   285
** This is an EXPERIMENTAL api and is subject to change or removal.
dvander@1203
   286
*/
dvander@1203
   287
int sqlite3_value_numeric_type(sqlite3_value *pVal){
dvander@1203
   288
  Mem *pMem = (Mem*)pVal;
dvander@1203
   289
  applyNumericAffinity(pMem);
dvander@1203
   290
  storeTypeInfo(pMem, 0);
dvander@1203
   291
  return pMem->type;
dvander@1203
   292
}
dvander@1203
   293
dvander@1203
   294
/*
dvander@1203
   295
** Exported version of applyAffinity(). This one works on sqlite3_value*, 
dvander@1203
   296
** not the internal Mem* type.
dvander@1203
   297
*/
dvander@1203
   298
void sqlite3ValueApplyAffinity(sqlite3_value *pVal, u8 affinity, u8 enc){
dvander@1203
   299
  applyAffinity((Mem *)pVal, affinity, enc);
dvander@1203
   300
}
dvander@1203
   301
dvander@1203
   302
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
dvander@1203
   303
/*
dvander@1203
   304
** Write a nice string representation of the contents of cell pMem
dvander@1203
   305
** into buffer zBuf, length nBuf.
dvander@1203
   306
*/
dvander@1203
   307
void sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(Mem *pMem, char *zBuf){
dvander@1203
   308
  char *zCsr = zBuf;
dvander@1203
   309
  int f = pMem->flags;
dvander@1203
   310
dvander@1203
   311
  static const char *const encnames[] = {"(X)", "(8)", "(16LE)", "(16BE)"};
dvander@1203
   312
dvander@1203
   313
  if( f&MEM_Blob ){
dvander@1203
   314
    int i;
dvander@1203
   315
    char c;
dvander@1203
   316
    if( f & MEM_Dyn ){
dvander@1203
   317
      c = 'z';
dvander@1203
   318
      assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 );
dvander@1203
   319
    }else if( f & MEM_Static ){
dvander@1203
   320
      c = 't';
dvander@1203
   321
      assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 );
dvander@1203
   322
    }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){
dvander@1203
   323
      c = 'e';
dvander@1203
   324
      assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 );
dvander@1203
   325
    }else{
dvander@1203
   326
      c = 's';
dvander@1203
   327
    }
dvander@1203
   328
dvander@1203
   329
    sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%c", c);
dvander@1203
   330
    zCsr += strlen(zCsr);
dvander@1203
   331
    sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%d[", pMem->n);
dvander@1203
   332
    zCsr += strlen(zCsr);
dvander@1203
   333
    for(i=0; i<16 && i<pMem->n; i++){
dvander@1203
   334
      sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "%02X", ((int)pMem->z[i] & 0xFF));
dvander@1203
   335
      zCsr += strlen(zCsr);
dvander@1203
   336
    }
dvander@1203
   337
    for(i=0; i<16 && i<pMem->n; i++){
dvander@1203
   338
      char z = pMem->z[i];
dvander@1203
   339
      if( z<32 || z>126 ) *zCsr++ = '.';
dvander@1203
   340
      else *zCsr++ = z;
dvander@1203
   341
    }
dvander@1203
   342
dvander@1203
   343
    sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr, "]%s", encnames[pMem->enc]);
dvander@1203
   344
    zCsr += strlen(zCsr);
dvander@1203
   345
    if( f & MEM_Zero ){
dvander@1203
   346
      sqlite3_snprintf(100, zCsr,"+%lldz",pMem->u.i);
dvander@1203
   347
      zCsr += strlen(zCsr);
dvander@1203
   348
    }
dvander@1203
   349
    *zCsr = '\0';
dvander@1203
   350
  }else if( f & MEM_Str ){
dvander@1203
   351
    int j, k;
dvander@1203
   352
    zBuf[0] = ' ';
dvander@1203
   353
    if( f & MEM_Dyn ){
dvander@1203
   354
      zBuf[1] = 'z';
dvander@1203
   355
      assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Ephem))==0 );
dvander@1203
   356
    }else if( f & MEM_Static ){
dvander@1203
   357
      zBuf[1] = 't';
dvander@1203
   358
      assert( (f & (MEM_Dyn|MEM_Ephem))==0 );
dvander@1203
   359
    }else if( f & MEM_Ephem ){
dvander@1203
   360
      zBuf[1] = 'e';
dvander@1203
   361
      assert( (f & (MEM_Static|MEM_Dyn))==0 );
dvander@1203
   362
    }else{
dvander@1203
   363
      zBuf[1] = 's';
dvander@1203
   364
    }
dvander@1203
   365
    k = 2;
dvander@1203
   366
    sqlite3_snprintf(100, &zBuf[k], "%d", pMem->n);
dvander@1203
   367
    k += strlen(&zBuf[k]);
dvander@1203
   368
    zBuf[k++] = '[';
dvander@1203
   369
    for(j=0; j<15 && j<pMem->n; j++){
dvander@1203
   370
      u8 c = pMem->z[j];
dvander@1203
   371
      if( c>=0x20 && c<0x7f ){
dvander@1203
   372
        zBuf[k++] = c;
dvander@1203
   373
      }else{
dvander@1203
   374
        zBuf[k++] = '.';
dvander@1203
   375
      }
dvander@1203
   376
    }
dvander@1203
   377
    zBuf[k++] = ']';
dvander@1203
   378
    sqlite3_snprintf(100,&zBuf[k], encnames[pMem->enc]);
dvander@1203
   379
    k += strlen(&zBuf[k]);
dvander@1203
   380
    zBuf[k++] = 0;
dvander@1203
   381
  }
dvander@1203
   382
}
dvander@1203
   383
#endif
dvander@1203
   384
dvander@1203
   385
dvander@1203
   386
#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
dvander@1203
   387
/*
dvander@1203
   388
** The following routine only works on pentium-class processors.
dvander@1203
   389
** It uses the RDTSC opcode to read the cycle count value out of the
dvander@1203
   390
** processor and returns that value.  This can be used for high-res
dvander@1203
   391
** profiling.
dvander@1203
   392
*/
dvander@1203
   393
__inline__ unsigned long long int hwtime(void){
dvander@1203
   394
  unsigned long long int x;
dvander@1203
   395
  __asm__("rdtsc\n\t"
dvander@1203
   396
          "mov %%edx, %%ecx\n\t"
dvander@1203
   397
          :"=A" (x));
dvander@1203
   398
  return x;
dvander@1203
   399
}
dvander@1203
   400
#endif
dvander@1203
   401
dvander@1203
   402
/*
dvander@1203
   403
** The CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPT macro defined here looks to see if the
dvander@1203
   404
** sqlite3_interrupt() routine has been called.  If it has been, then
dvander@1203
   405
** processing of the VDBE program is interrupted.
dvander@1203
   406
**
dvander@1203
   407
** This macro added to every instruction that does a jump in order to
dvander@1203
   408
** implement a loop.  This test used to be on every single instruction,
dvander@1203
   409
** but that meant we more testing that we needed.  By only testing the
dvander@1203
   410
** flag on jump instructions, we get a (small) speed improvement.
dvander@1203
   411
*/
dvander@1203
   412
#define CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPT \
dvander@1203
   413
   if( db->u1.isInterrupted ) goto abort_due_to_interrupt;
dvander@1203
   414
dvander@1203
   415
dvander@1203
   416
/*
dvander@1203
   417
** Execute as much of a VDBE program as we can then return.
dvander@1203
   418
**
dvander@1203
   419
** sqlite3VdbeMakeReady() must be called before this routine in order to
dvander@1203
   420
** close the program with a final OP_Halt and to set up the callbacks
dvander@1203
   421
** and the error message pointer.
dvander@1203
   422
**
dvander@1203
   423
** Whenever a row or result data is available, this routine will either
dvander@1203
   424
** invoke the result callback (if there is one) or return with
dvander@1203
   425
** SQLITE_ROW.
dvander@1203
   426
**
dvander@1203
   427
** If an attempt is made to open a locked database, then this routine
dvander@1203
   428
** will either invoke the busy callback (if there is one) or it will
dvander@1203
   429
** return SQLITE_BUSY.
dvander@1203
   430
**
dvander@1203
   431
** If an error occurs, an error message is written to memory obtained
dvander@1203
   432
** from sqliteMalloc() and p->zErrMsg is made to point to that memory.
dvander@1203
   433
** The error code is stored in p->rc and this routine returns SQLITE_ERROR.
dvander@1203
   434
**
dvander@1203
   435
** If the callback ever returns non-zero, then the program exits
dvander@1203
   436
** immediately.  There will be no error message but the p->rc field is
dvander@1203
   437
** set to SQLITE_ABORT and this routine will return SQLITE_ERROR.
dvander@1203
   438
**
dvander@1203
   439
** A memory allocation error causes p->rc to be set to SQLITE_NOMEM and this
dvander@1203
   440
** routine to return SQLITE_ERROR.
dvander@1203
   441
**
dvander@1203
   442
** Other fatal errors return SQLITE_ERROR.
dvander@1203
   443
**
dvander@1203
   444
** After this routine has finished, sqlite3VdbeFinalize() should be
dvander@1203
   445
** used to clean up the mess that was left behind.
dvander@1203
   446
*/
dvander@1203
   447
int sqlite3VdbeExec(
dvander@1203
   448
  Vdbe *p                    /* The VDBE */
dvander@1203
   449
){
dvander@1203
   450
  int pc;                    /* The program counter */
dvander@1203
   451
  Op *pOp;                   /* Current operation */
dvander@1203
   452
  int rc = SQLITE_OK;        /* Value to return */
dvander@1203
   453
  sqlite3 *db = p->db;       /* The database */
dvander@1203
   454
  u8 encoding = ENC(db);     /* The database encoding */
dvander@1203
   455
  Mem *pTos;                 /* Top entry in the operand stack */
dvander@1203
   456
#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
dvander@1203
   457
  unsigned long long start;  /* CPU clock count at start of opcode */
dvander@1203
   458
  int origPc;                /* Program counter at start of opcode */
dvander@1203
   459
#endif
dvander@1203
   460
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK
dvander@1203
   461
  int nProgressOps = 0;      /* Opcodes executed since progress callback. */
dvander@1203
   462
#endif
dvander@1203
   463
#ifndef NDEBUG
dvander@1203
   464
  Mem *pStackLimit;
dvander@1203
   465
#endif
dvander@1203
   466
dvander@1203
   467
  if( p->magic!=VDBE_MAGIC_RUN ) return SQLITE_MISUSE;
dvander@1203
   468
  assert( db->magic==SQLITE_MAGIC_BUSY );
dvander@1203
   469
  pTos = p->pTos;
dvander@1203
   470
  if( p->rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){
dvander@1203
   471
    /* This happens if a malloc() inside a call to sqlite3_column_text() or
dvander@1203
   472
    ** sqlite3_column_text16() failed.  */
dvander@1203
   473
    goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
   474
  }
dvander@1203
   475
  assert( p->rc==SQLITE_OK || p->rc==SQLITE_BUSY );
dvander@1203
   476
  p->rc = SQLITE_OK;
dvander@1203
   477
  assert( p->explain==0 );
dvander@1203
   478
  if( p->popStack ){
dvander@1203
   479
    popStack(&pTos, p->popStack);
dvander@1203
   480
    p->popStack = 0;
dvander@1203
   481
  }
dvander@1203
   482
  p->resOnStack = 0;
dvander@1203
   483
  db->busyHandler.nBusy = 0;
dvander@1203
   484
  CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPT;
dvander@1203
   485
  sqlite3VdbeIOTraceSql(p);
dvander@1203
   486
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
dvander@1203
   487
  if( (p->db->flags & SQLITE_VdbeListing)!=0
dvander@1203
   488
    || sqlite3OsFileExists("vdbe_explain")
dvander@1203
   489
  ){
dvander@1203
   490
    int i;
dvander@1203
   491
    printf("VDBE Program Listing:\n");
dvander@1203
   492
    sqlite3VdbePrintSql(p);
dvander@1203
   493
    for(i=0; i<p->nOp; i++){
dvander@1203
   494
      sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, i, &p->aOp[i]);
dvander@1203
   495
    }
dvander@1203
   496
  }
dvander@1203
   497
  if( sqlite3OsFileExists("vdbe_trace") ){
dvander@1203
   498
    p->trace = stdout;
dvander@1203
   499
  }
dvander@1203
   500
#endif
dvander@1203
   501
  for(pc=p->pc; rc==SQLITE_OK; pc++){
dvander@1203
   502
    assert( pc>=0 && pc<p->nOp );
dvander@1203
   503
    assert( pTos<=&p->aStack[pc] );
dvander@1203
   504
    if( sqlite3MallocFailed() ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
   505
#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
dvander@1203
   506
    origPc = pc;
dvander@1203
   507
    start = hwtime();
dvander@1203
   508
#endif
dvander@1203
   509
    pOp = &p->aOp[pc];
dvander@1203
   510
dvander@1203
   511
    /* Only allow tracing if SQLITE_DEBUG is defined.
dvander@1203
   512
    */
dvander@1203
   513
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
dvander@1203
   514
    if( p->trace ){
dvander@1203
   515
      if( pc==0 ){
dvander@1203
   516
        printf("VDBE Execution Trace:\n");
dvander@1203
   517
        sqlite3VdbePrintSql(p);
dvander@1203
   518
      }
dvander@1203
   519
      sqlite3VdbePrintOp(p->trace, pc, pOp);
dvander@1203
   520
    }
dvander@1203
   521
    if( p->trace==0 && pc==0 && sqlite3OsFileExists("vdbe_sqltrace") ){
dvander@1203
   522
      sqlite3VdbePrintSql(p);
dvander@1203
   523
    }
dvander@1203
   524
#endif
dvander@1203
   525
      
dvander@1203
   526
dvander@1203
   527
    /* Check to see if we need to simulate an interrupt.  This only happens
dvander@1203
   528
    ** if we have a special test build.
dvander@1203
   529
    */
dvander@1203
   530
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
   531
    if( sqlite3_interrupt_count>0 ){
dvander@1203
   532
      sqlite3_interrupt_count--;
dvander@1203
   533
      if( sqlite3_interrupt_count==0 ){
dvander@1203
   534
        sqlite3_interrupt(db);
dvander@1203
   535
      }
dvander@1203
   536
    }
dvander@1203
   537
#endif
dvander@1203
   538
dvander@1203
   539
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_PROGRESS_CALLBACK
dvander@1203
   540
    /* Call the progress callback if it is configured and the required number
dvander@1203
   541
    ** of VDBE ops have been executed (either since this invocation of
dvander@1203
   542
    ** sqlite3VdbeExec() or since last time the progress callback was called).
dvander@1203
   543
    ** If the progress callback returns non-zero, exit the virtual machine with
dvander@1203
   544
    ** a return code SQLITE_ABORT.
dvander@1203
   545
    */
dvander@1203
   546
    if( db->xProgress ){
dvander@1203
   547
      if( db->nProgressOps==nProgressOps ){
dvander@1203
   548
        int prc;
dvander@1203
   549
        if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
   550
        prc =db->xProgress(db->pProgressArg);
dvander@1203
   551
        if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
   552
        if( prc!=0 ){
dvander@1203
   553
          rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT;
dvander@1203
   554
          goto vdbe_halt;
dvander@1203
   555
        }
dvander@1203
   556
        nProgressOps = 0;
dvander@1203
   557
      }
dvander@1203
   558
      nProgressOps++;
dvander@1203
   559
    }
dvander@1203
   560
#endif
dvander@1203
   561
dvander@1203
   562
#ifndef NDEBUG
dvander@1203
   563
    /* This is to check that the return value of static function
dvander@1203
   564
    ** opcodeNoPush() (see vdbeaux.c) returns values that match the
dvander@1203
   565
    ** implementation of the virtual machine in this file. If
dvander@1203
   566
    ** opcodeNoPush() returns non-zero, then the stack is guarenteed
dvander@1203
   567
    ** not to grow when the opcode is executed. If it returns zero, then
dvander@1203
   568
    ** the stack may grow by at most 1.
dvander@1203
   569
    **
dvander@1203
   570
    ** The global wrapper function sqlite3VdbeOpcodeUsesStack() is not 
dvander@1203
   571
    ** available if NDEBUG is defined at build time.
dvander@1203
   572
    */ 
dvander@1203
   573
    pStackLimit = pTos;
dvander@1203
   574
    if( !sqlite3VdbeOpcodeNoPush(pOp->opcode) ){
dvander@1203
   575
      pStackLimit++;
dvander@1203
   576
    }
dvander@1203
   577
#endif
dvander@1203
   578
dvander@1203
   579
    switch( pOp->opcode ){
dvander@1203
   580
dvander@1203
   581
/*****************************************************************************
dvander@1203
   582
** What follows is a massive switch statement where each case implements a
dvander@1203
   583
** separate instruction in the virtual machine.  If we follow the usual
dvander@1203
   584
** indentation conventions, each case should be indented by 6 spaces.  But
dvander@1203
   585
** that is a lot of wasted space on the left margin.  So the code within
dvander@1203
   586
** the switch statement will break with convention and be flush-left. Another
dvander@1203
   587
** big comment (similar to this one) will mark the point in the code where
dvander@1203
   588
** we transition back to normal indentation.
dvander@1203
   589
**
dvander@1203
   590
** The formatting of each case is important.  The makefile for SQLite
dvander@1203
   591
** generates two C files "opcodes.h" and "opcodes.c" by scanning this
dvander@1203
   592
** file looking for lines that begin with "case OP_".  The opcodes.h files
dvander@1203
   593
** will be filled with #defines that give unique integer values to each
dvander@1203
   594
** opcode and the opcodes.c file is filled with an array of strings where
dvander@1203
   595
** each string is the symbolic name for the corresponding opcode.  If the
dvander@1203
   596
** case statement is followed by a comment of the form "/# same as ... #/"
dvander@1203
   597
** that comment is used to determine the particular value of the opcode.
dvander@1203
   598
**
dvander@1203
   599
** If a comment on the same line as the "case OP_" construction contains
dvander@1203
   600
** the word "no-push", then the opcode is guarenteed not to grow the 
dvander@1203
   601
** vdbe stack when it is executed. See function opcode() in
dvander@1203
   602
** vdbeaux.c for details.
dvander@1203
   603
**
dvander@1203
   604
** Documentation about VDBE opcodes is generated by scanning this file
dvander@1203
   605
** for lines of that contain "Opcode:".  That line and all subsequent
dvander@1203
   606
** comment lines are used in the generation of the opcode.html documentation
dvander@1203
   607
** file.
dvander@1203
   608
**
dvander@1203
   609
** SUMMARY:
dvander@1203
   610
**
dvander@1203
   611
**     Formatting is important to scripts that scan this file.
dvander@1203
   612
**     Do not deviate from the formatting style currently in use.
dvander@1203
   613
**
dvander@1203
   614
*****************************************************************************/
dvander@1203
   615
dvander@1203
   616
/* Opcode:  Goto * P2 *
dvander@1203
   617
**
dvander@1203
   618
** An unconditional jump to address P2.
dvander@1203
   619
** The next instruction executed will be 
dvander@1203
   620
** the one at index P2 from the beginning of
dvander@1203
   621
** the program.
dvander@1203
   622
*/
dvander@1203
   623
case OP_Goto: {             /* no-push */
dvander@1203
   624
  CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPT;
dvander@1203
   625
  pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
   626
  break;
dvander@1203
   627
}
dvander@1203
   628
dvander@1203
   629
/* Opcode:  Gosub * P2 *
dvander@1203
   630
**
dvander@1203
   631
** Push the current address plus 1 onto the return address stack
dvander@1203
   632
** and then jump to address P2.
dvander@1203
   633
**
dvander@1203
   634
** The return address stack is of limited depth.  If too many
dvander@1203
   635
** OP_Gosub operations occur without intervening OP_Returns, then
dvander@1203
   636
** the return address stack will fill up and processing will abort
dvander@1203
   637
** with a fatal error.
dvander@1203
   638
*/
dvander@1203
   639
case OP_Gosub: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
   640
  assert( p->returnDepth<sizeof(p->returnStack)/sizeof(p->returnStack[0]) );
dvander@1203
   641
  p->returnStack[p->returnDepth++] = pc+1;
dvander@1203
   642
  pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
   643
  break;
dvander@1203
   644
}
dvander@1203
   645
dvander@1203
   646
/* Opcode:  Return * * *
dvander@1203
   647
**
dvander@1203
   648
** Jump immediately to the next instruction after the last unreturned
dvander@1203
   649
** OP_Gosub.  If an OP_Return has occurred for all OP_Gosubs, then
dvander@1203
   650
** processing aborts with a fatal error.
dvander@1203
   651
*/
dvander@1203
   652
case OP_Return: {           /* no-push */
dvander@1203
   653
  assert( p->returnDepth>0 );
dvander@1203
   654
  p->returnDepth--;
dvander@1203
   655
  pc = p->returnStack[p->returnDepth] - 1;
dvander@1203
   656
  break;
dvander@1203
   657
}
dvander@1203
   658
dvander@1203
   659
/* Opcode:  Halt P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
   660
**
dvander@1203
   661
** Exit immediately.  All open cursors, Fifos, etc are closed
dvander@1203
   662
** automatically.
dvander@1203
   663
**
dvander@1203
   664
** P1 is the result code returned by sqlite3_exec(), sqlite3_reset(),
dvander@1203
   665
** or sqlite3_finalize().  For a normal halt, this should be SQLITE_OK (0).
dvander@1203
   666
** For errors, it can be some other value.  If P1!=0 then P2 will determine
dvander@1203
   667
** whether or not to rollback the current transaction.  Do not rollback
dvander@1203
   668
** if P2==OE_Fail. Do the rollback if P2==OE_Rollback.  If P2==OE_Abort,
dvander@1203
   669
** then back out all changes that have occurred during this execution of the
dvander@1203
   670
** VDBE, but do not rollback the transaction. 
dvander@1203
   671
**
dvander@1203
   672
** If P3 is not null then it is an error message string.
dvander@1203
   673
**
dvander@1203
   674
** There is an implied "Halt 0 0 0" instruction inserted at the very end of
dvander@1203
   675
** every program.  So a jump past the last instruction of the program
dvander@1203
   676
** is the same as executing Halt.
dvander@1203
   677
*/
dvander@1203
   678
case OP_Halt: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
   679
  p->pTos = pTos;
dvander@1203
   680
  p->rc = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
   681
  p->pc = pc;
dvander@1203
   682
  p->errorAction = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
   683
  if( pOp->p3 ){
dvander@1203
   684
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, pOp->p3, (char*)0);
dvander@1203
   685
  }
dvander@1203
   686
  rc = sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
dvander@1203
   687
  assert( rc==SQLITE_BUSY || rc==SQLITE_OK );
dvander@1203
   688
  if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
dvander@1203
   689
    p->rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
dvander@1203
   690
    return SQLITE_BUSY;
dvander@1203
   691
  }
dvander@1203
   692
  return p->rc ? SQLITE_ERROR : SQLITE_DONE;
dvander@1203
   693
}
dvander@1203
   694
dvander@1203
   695
/* Opcode: Integer P1 * *
dvander@1203
   696
**
dvander@1203
   697
** The 32-bit integer value P1 is pushed onto the stack.
dvander@1203
   698
*/
dvander@1203
   699
case OP_Integer: {
dvander@1203
   700
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
   701
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
   702
  pTos->u.i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
   703
  break;
dvander@1203
   704
}
dvander@1203
   705
dvander@1203
   706
/* Opcode: Int64 * * P3
dvander@1203
   707
**
dvander@1203
   708
** P3 is a string representation of an integer.  Convert that integer
dvander@1203
   709
** to a 64-bit value and push it onto the stack.
dvander@1203
   710
*/
dvander@1203
   711
case OP_Int64: {
dvander@1203
   712
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
   713
  assert( pOp->p3!=0 );
dvander@1203
   714
  pTos->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term;
dvander@1203
   715
  pTos->z = pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
   716
  pTos->n = strlen(pTos->z);
dvander@1203
   717
  pTos->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
dvander@1203
   718
  pTos->u.i = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pTos);
dvander@1203
   719
  pTos->flags |= MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
   720
  break;
dvander@1203
   721
}
dvander@1203
   722
dvander@1203
   723
/* Opcode: Real * * P3
dvander@1203
   724
**
dvander@1203
   725
** The string value P3 is converted to a real and pushed on to the stack.
dvander@1203
   726
*/
dvander@1203
   727
case OP_Real: {            /* same as TK_FLOAT, */
dvander@1203
   728
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
   729
  pTos->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term;
dvander@1203
   730
  pTos->z = pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
   731
  pTos->n = strlen(pTos->z);
dvander@1203
   732
  pTos->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
dvander@1203
   733
  pTos->r = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pTos);
dvander@1203
   734
  pTos->flags |= MEM_Real;
dvander@1203
   735
  sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pTos, encoding);
dvander@1203
   736
  break;
dvander@1203
   737
}
dvander@1203
   738
dvander@1203
   739
/* Opcode: String8 * * P3
dvander@1203
   740
**
dvander@1203
   741
** P3 points to a nul terminated UTF-8 string. This opcode is transformed 
dvander@1203
   742
** into an OP_String before it is executed for the first time.
dvander@1203
   743
*/
dvander@1203
   744
case OP_String8: {         /* same as TK_STRING */
dvander@1203
   745
  assert( pOp->p3!=0 );
dvander@1203
   746
  pOp->opcode = OP_String;
dvander@1203
   747
  pOp->p1 = strlen(pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
   748
  assert( SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH < SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH );
dvander@1203
   749
  assert( pOp->p1 < SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH );
dvander@1203
   750
dvander@1203
   751
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_UTF16
dvander@1203
   752
  if( encoding!=SQLITE_UTF8 ){
dvander@1203
   753
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
   754
    sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pTos, pOp->p3, -1, SQLITE_UTF8, SQLITE_STATIC);
dvander@1203
   755
    if( SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pTos, encoding) ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
   756
    if( SQLITE_OK!=sqlite3VdbeMemDynamicify(pTos) ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
   757
    pTos->flags &= ~(MEM_Dyn);
dvander@1203
   758
    pTos->flags |= MEM_Static;
dvander@1203
   759
    if( pOp->p3type==P3_DYNAMIC ){
dvander@1203
   760
      sqliteFree(pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
   761
    }
dvander@1203
   762
    pOp->p3type = P3_DYNAMIC;
dvander@1203
   763
    pOp->p3 = pTos->z;
dvander@1203
   764
    pOp->p1 = pTos->n;
dvander@1203
   765
    assert( pOp->p1 < SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ); /* Due to SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH */
dvander@1203
   766
    break;
dvander@1203
   767
  }
dvander@1203
   768
#endif
dvander@1203
   769
  /* Otherwise fall through to the next case, OP_String */
dvander@1203
   770
}
dvander@1203
   771
  
dvander@1203
   772
/* Opcode: String P1 * P3
dvander@1203
   773
**
dvander@1203
   774
** The string value P3 of length P1 (bytes) is pushed onto the stack.
dvander@1203
   775
*/
dvander@1203
   776
case OP_String: {
dvander@1203
   777
  assert( pOp->p1 < SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ); /* Due to SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH */
dvander@1203
   778
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
   779
  assert( pOp->p3!=0 );
dvander@1203
   780
  pTos->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Static|MEM_Term;
dvander@1203
   781
  pTos->z = pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
   782
  pTos->n = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
   783
  pTos->enc = encoding;
dvander@1203
   784
  break;
dvander@1203
   785
}
dvander@1203
   786
dvander@1203
   787
/* Opcode: Null * * *
dvander@1203
   788
**
dvander@1203
   789
** Push a NULL onto the stack.
dvander@1203
   790
*/
dvander@1203
   791
case OP_Null: {
dvander@1203
   792
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
   793
  pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
   794
  pTos->n = 0;
dvander@1203
   795
  break;
dvander@1203
   796
}
dvander@1203
   797
dvander@1203
   798
dvander@1203
   799
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_BLOB_LITERAL
dvander@1203
   800
/* Opcode: HexBlob * * P3
dvander@1203
   801
**
dvander@1203
   802
** P3 is an UTF-8 SQL hex encoding of a blob. The blob is pushed onto the
dvander@1203
   803
** vdbe stack.
dvander@1203
   804
**
dvander@1203
   805
** The first time this instruction executes, in transforms itself into a
dvander@1203
   806
** 'Blob' opcode with a binary blob as P3.
dvander@1203
   807
*/
dvander@1203
   808
case OP_HexBlob: {            /* same as TK_BLOB */
dvander@1203
   809
  pOp->opcode = OP_Blob;
dvander@1203
   810
  pOp->p1 = strlen(pOp->p3)/2;
dvander@1203
   811
  assert( SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH < SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH );
dvander@1203
   812
  assert( pOp->p1 < SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH );
dvander@1203
   813
  if( pOp->p1 ){
dvander@1203
   814
    char *zBlob = sqlite3HexToBlob(pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
   815
    if( !zBlob ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
   816
    if( pOp->p3type==P3_DYNAMIC ){
dvander@1203
   817
      sqliteFree(pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
   818
    }
dvander@1203
   819
    pOp->p3 = zBlob;
dvander@1203
   820
    pOp->p3type = P3_DYNAMIC;
dvander@1203
   821
  }else{
dvander@1203
   822
    if( pOp->p3type==P3_DYNAMIC ){
dvander@1203
   823
      sqliteFree(pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
   824
    }
dvander@1203
   825
    pOp->p3type = P3_STATIC;
dvander@1203
   826
    pOp->p3 = "";
dvander@1203
   827
  }
dvander@1203
   828
dvander@1203
   829
  /* Fall through to the next case, OP_Blob. */
dvander@1203
   830
}
dvander@1203
   831
dvander@1203
   832
/* Opcode: Blob P1 * P3
dvander@1203
   833
**
dvander@1203
   834
** P3 points to a blob of data P1 bytes long. Push this
dvander@1203
   835
** value onto the stack. This instruction is not coded directly
dvander@1203
   836
** by the compiler. Instead, the compiler layer specifies
dvander@1203
   837
** an OP_HexBlob opcode, with the hex string representation of
dvander@1203
   838
** the blob as P3. This opcode is transformed to an OP_Blob
dvander@1203
   839
** the first time it is executed.
dvander@1203
   840
*/
dvander@1203
   841
case OP_Blob: {
dvander@1203
   842
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
   843
  assert( pOp->p1 < SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ); /* Due to SQLITE_MAX_SQL_LENGTH */
dvander@1203
   844
  sqlite3VdbeMemSetStr(pTos, pOp->p3, pOp->p1, 0, 0);
dvander@1203
   845
  pTos->enc = encoding;
dvander@1203
   846
  break;
dvander@1203
   847
}
dvander@1203
   848
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_BLOB_LITERAL */
dvander@1203
   849
dvander@1203
   850
/* Opcode: Variable P1 * *
dvander@1203
   851
**
dvander@1203
   852
** Push the value of variable P1 onto the stack.  A variable is
dvander@1203
   853
** an unknown in the original SQL string as handed to sqlite3_compile().
dvander@1203
   854
** Any occurance of the '?' character in the original SQL is considered
dvander@1203
   855
** a variable.  Variables in the SQL string are number from left to
dvander@1203
   856
** right beginning with 1.  The values of variables are set using the
dvander@1203
   857
** sqlite3_bind() API.
dvander@1203
   858
*/
dvander@1203
   859
case OP_Variable: {
dvander@1203
   860
  int j = pOp->p1 - 1;
dvander@1203
   861
  Mem *pVar;
dvander@1203
   862
  assert( j>=0 && j<p->nVar );
dvander@1203
   863
dvander@1203
   864
  pVar = &p->aVar[j];
dvander@1203
   865
  if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pVar) ){
dvander@1203
   866
    goto too_big;
dvander@1203
   867
  }
dvander@1203
   868
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
   869
  sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pTos, &p->aVar[j], MEM_Static);
dvander@1203
   870
  break;
dvander@1203
   871
}
dvander@1203
   872
dvander@1203
   873
/* Opcode: Pop P1 * *
dvander@1203
   874
**
dvander@1203
   875
** P1 elements are popped off of the top of stack and discarded.
dvander@1203
   876
*/
dvander@1203
   877
case OP_Pop: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
   878
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 );
dvander@1203
   879
  popStack(&pTos, pOp->p1);
dvander@1203
   880
  assert( pTos>=&p->aStack[-1] );
dvander@1203
   881
  break;
dvander@1203
   882
}
dvander@1203
   883
dvander@1203
   884
/* Opcode: Dup P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
   885
**
dvander@1203
   886
** A copy of the P1-th element of the stack 
dvander@1203
   887
** is made and pushed onto the top of the stack.
dvander@1203
   888
** The top of the stack is element 0.  So the
dvander@1203
   889
** instruction "Dup 0 0 0" will make a copy of the
dvander@1203
   890
** top of the stack.
dvander@1203
   891
**
dvander@1203
   892
** If the content of the P1-th element is a dynamically
dvander@1203
   893
** allocated string, then a new copy of that string
dvander@1203
   894
** is made if P2==0.  If P2!=0, then just a pointer
dvander@1203
   895
** to the string is copied.
dvander@1203
   896
**
dvander@1203
   897
** Also see the Pull instruction.
dvander@1203
   898
*/
dvander@1203
   899
case OP_Dup: {
dvander@1203
   900
  Mem *pFrom = &pTos[-pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
   901
  assert( pFrom<=pTos && pFrom>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
   902
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
   903
  sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pTos, pFrom, MEM_Ephem);
dvander@1203
   904
  if( pOp->p2 ){
dvander@1203
   905
    Deephemeralize(pTos);
dvander@1203
   906
  }
dvander@1203
   907
  break;
dvander@1203
   908
}
dvander@1203
   909
dvander@1203
   910
/* Opcode: Pull P1 * *
dvander@1203
   911
**
dvander@1203
   912
** The P1-th element is removed from its current location on 
dvander@1203
   913
** the stack and pushed back on top of the stack.  The
dvander@1203
   914
** top of the stack is element 0, so "Pull 0 0 0" is
dvander@1203
   915
** a no-op.  "Pull 1 0 0" swaps the top two elements of
dvander@1203
   916
** the stack.
dvander@1203
   917
**
dvander@1203
   918
** See also the Dup instruction.
dvander@1203
   919
*/
dvander@1203
   920
case OP_Pull: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
   921
  Mem *pFrom = &pTos[-pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
   922
  int i;
dvander@1203
   923
  Mem ts;
dvander@1203
   924
dvander@1203
   925
  ts = *pFrom;
dvander@1203
   926
  Deephemeralize(pTos);
dvander@1203
   927
  for(i=0; i<pOp->p1; i++, pFrom++){
dvander@1203
   928
    Deephemeralize(&pFrom[1]);
dvander@1203
   929
    assert( (pFrom[1].flags & MEM_Ephem)==0 );
dvander@1203
   930
    *pFrom = pFrom[1];
dvander@1203
   931
    if( pFrom->flags & MEM_Short ){
dvander@1203
   932
      assert( pFrom->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) );
dvander@1203
   933
      assert( pFrom->z==pFrom[1].zShort );
dvander@1203
   934
      pFrom->z = pFrom->zShort;
dvander@1203
   935
    }
dvander@1203
   936
  }
dvander@1203
   937
  *pTos = ts;
dvander@1203
   938
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Short ){
dvander@1203
   939
    assert( pTos->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) );
dvander@1203
   940
    assert( pTos->z==pTos[-pOp->p1].zShort );
dvander@1203
   941
    pTos->z = pTos->zShort;
dvander@1203
   942
  }
dvander@1203
   943
  break;
dvander@1203
   944
}
dvander@1203
   945
dvander@1203
   946
/* Opcode: Push P1 * *
dvander@1203
   947
**
dvander@1203
   948
** Overwrite the value of the P1-th element down on the
dvander@1203
   949
** stack (P1==0 is the top of the stack) with the value
dvander@1203
   950
** of the top of the stack.  Then pop the top of the stack.
dvander@1203
   951
*/
dvander@1203
   952
case OP_Push: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
   953
  Mem *pTo = &pTos[-pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
   954
dvander@1203
   955
  assert( pTo>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
   956
  sqlite3VdbeMemMove(pTo, pTos);
dvander@1203
   957
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
   958
  break;
dvander@1203
   959
}
dvander@1203
   960
dvander@1203
   961
/* Opcode: Callback P1 * *
dvander@1203
   962
**
dvander@1203
   963
** The top P1 values on the stack represent a single result row from
dvander@1203
   964
** a query.  This opcode causes the sqlite3_step() call to terminate
dvander@1203
   965
** with an SQLITE_ROW return code and it sets up the sqlite3_stmt
dvander@1203
   966
** structure to provide access to the top P1 values as the result
dvander@1203
   967
** row.  When the sqlite3_step() function is run again, the top P1
dvander@1203
   968
** values will be automatically popped from the stack before the next
dvander@1203
   969
** instruction executes.
dvander@1203
   970
*/
dvander@1203
   971
case OP_Callback: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
   972
  Mem *pMem;
dvander@1203
   973
  Mem *pFirstColumn;
dvander@1203
   974
  assert( p->nResColumn==pOp->p1 );
dvander@1203
   975
dvander@1203
   976
  /* Data in the pager might be moved or changed out from under us
dvander@1203
   977
  ** in between the return from this sqlite3_step() call and the
dvander@1203
   978
  ** next call to sqlite3_step().  So deephermeralize everything on 
dvander@1203
   979
  ** the stack.  Note that ephemeral data is never stored in memory 
dvander@1203
   980
  ** cells so we do not have to worry about them.
dvander@1203
   981
  */
dvander@1203
   982
  pFirstColumn = &pTos[0-pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
   983
  for(pMem = p->aStack; pMem<pFirstColumn; pMem++){
dvander@1203
   984
    Deephemeralize(pMem);
dvander@1203
   985
  }
dvander@1203
   986
dvander@1203
   987
  /* Invalidate all ephemeral cursor row caches */
dvander@1203
   988
  p->cacheCtr = (p->cacheCtr + 2)|1;
dvander@1203
   989
dvander@1203
   990
  /* Make sure the results of the current row are \000 terminated
dvander@1203
   991
  ** and have an assigned type.  The results are deephemeralized as
dvander@1203
   992
  ** as side effect.
dvander@1203
   993
  */
dvander@1203
   994
  for(; pMem<=pTos; pMem++ ){
dvander@1203
   995
    sqlite3VdbeMemNulTerminate(pMem);
dvander@1203
   996
    storeTypeInfo(pMem, encoding);
dvander@1203
   997
  }
dvander@1203
   998
dvander@1203
   999
  /* Set up the statement structure so that it will pop the current
dvander@1203
  1000
  ** results from the stack when the statement returns.
dvander@1203
  1001
  */
dvander@1203
  1002
  p->resOnStack = 1;
dvander@1203
  1003
  p->nCallback++;
dvander@1203
  1004
  p->popStack = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  1005
  p->pc = pc + 1;
dvander@1203
  1006
  p->pTos = pTos;
dvander@1203
  1007
  return SQLITE_ROW;
dvander@1203
  1008
}
dvander@1203
  1009
dvander@1203
  1010
/* Opcode: Concat P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  1011
**
dvander@1203
  1012
** Look at the first P1+2 elements of the stack.  Append them all 
dvander@1203
  1013
** together with the lowest element first.  The original P1+2 elements
dvander@1203
  1014
** are popped from the stack if P2==0 and retained if P2==1.  If
dvander@1203
  1015
** any element of the stack is NULL, then the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1016
**
dvander@1203
  1017
** When P1==1, this routine makes a copy of the top stack element
dvander@1203
  1018
** into memory obtained from sqliteMalloc().
dvander@1203
  1019
*/
dvander@1203
  1020
case OP_Concat: {           /* same as TK_CONCAT */
dvander@1203
  1021
  char *zNew;
dvander@1203
  1022
  i64 nByte;
dvander@1203
  1023
  int nField;
dvander@1203
  1024
  int i, j;
dvander@1203
  1025
  Mem *pTerm;
dvander@1203
  1026
dvander@1203
  1027
  /* Loop through the stack elements to see how long the result will be. */
dvander@1203
  1028
  nField = pOp->p1 + 2;
dvander@1203
  1029
  pTerm = &pTos[1-nField];
dvander@1203
  1030
  nByte = 0;
dvander@1203
  1031
  for(i=0; i<nField; i++, pTerm++){
dvander@1203
  1032
    assert( pOp->p2==0 || (pTerm->flags&MEM_Str) );
dvander@1203
  1033
    if( pTerm->flags&MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  1034
      nByte = -1;
dvander@1203
  1035
      break;
dvander@1203
  1036
    }
dvander@1203
  1037
    ExpandBlob(pTerm);
dvander@1203
  1038
    Stringify(pTerm, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1039
    nByte += pTerm->n;
dvander@1203
  1040
  }
dvander@1203
  1041
dvander@1203
  1042
  if( nByte<0 ){
dvander@1203
  1043
    /* If nByte is less than zero, then there is a NULL value on the stack.
dvander@1203
  1044
    ** In this case just pop the values off the stack (if required) and
dvander@1203
  1045
    ** push on a NULL.
dvander@1203
  1046
    */
dvander@1203
  1047
    if( pOp->p2==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1048
      popStack(&pTos, nField);
dvander@1203
  1049
    }
dvander@1203
  1050
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  1051
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  1052
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1053
    /* Otherwise malloc() space for the result and concatenate all the
dvander@1203
  1054
    ** stack values.
dvander@1203
  1055
    */
dvander@1203
  1056
    if( nByte+2>SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ){
dvander@1203
  1057
      goto too_big;
dvander@1203
  1058
    }
dvander@1203
  1059
    zNew = sqliteMallocRaw( nByte+2 );
dvander@1203
  1060
    if( zNew==0 ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  1061
    j = 0;
dvander@1203
  1062
    pTerm = &pTos[1-nField];
dvander@1203
  1063
    for(i=j=0; i<nField; i++, pTerm++){
dvander@1203
  1064
      int n = pTerm->n;
dvander@1203
  1065
      assert( pTerm->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) );
dvander@1203
  1066
      memcpy(&zNew[j], pTerm->z, n);
dvander@1203
  1067
      j += n;
dvander@1203
  1068
    }
dvander@1203
  1069
    zNew[j] = 0;
dvander@1203
  1070
    zNew[j+1] = 0;
dvander@1203
  1071
    assert( j==nByte );
dvander@1203
  1072
dvander@1203
  1073
    if( pOp->p2==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1074
      popStack(&pTos, nField);
dvander@1203
  1075
    }
dvander@1203
  1076
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  1077
    pTos->n = j;
dvander@1203
  1078
    pTos->flags = MEM_Str|MEM_Dyn|MEM_Term;
dvander@1203
  1079
    pTos->xDel = 0;
dvander@1203
  1080
    pTos->enc = encoding;
dvander@1203
  1081
    pTos->z = zNew;
dvander@1203
  1082
  }
dvander@1203
  1083
  break;
dvander@1203
  1084
}
dvander@1203
  1085
dvander@1203
  1086
/* Opcode: Add * * *
dvander@1203
  1087
**
dvander@1203
  1088
** Pop the top two elements from the stack, add them together,
dvander@1203
  1089
** and push the result back onto the stack.  If either element
dvander@1203
  1090
** is a string then it is converted to a double using the atof()
dvander@1203
  1091
** function before the addition.
dvander@1203
  1092
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1093
*/
dvander@1203
  1094
/* Opcode: Multiply * * *
dvander@1203
  1095
**
dvander@1203
  1096
** Pop the top two elements from the stack, multiply them together,
dvander@1203
  1097
** and push the result back onto the stack.  If either element
dvander@1203
  1098
** is a string then it is converted to a double using the atof()
dvander@1203
  1099
** function before the multiplication.
dvander@1203
  1100
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1101
*/
dvander@1203
  1102
/* Opcode: Subtract * * *
dvander@1203
  1103
**
dvander@1203
  1104
** Pop the top two elements from the stack, subtract the
dvander@1203
  1105
** first (what was on top of the stack) from the second (the
dvander@1203
  1106
** next on stack)
dvander@1203
  1107
** and push the result back onto the stack.  If either element
dvander@1203
  1108
** is a string then it is converted to a double using the atof()
dvander@1203
  1109
** function before the subtraction.
dvander@1203
  1110
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1111
*/
dvander@1203
  1112
/* Opcode: Divide * * *
dvander@1203
  1113
**
dvander@1203
  1114
** Pop the top two elements from the stack, divide the
dvander@1203
  1115
** first (what was on top of the stack) from the second (the
dvander@1203
  1116
** next on stack)
dvander@1203
  1117
** and push the result back onto the stack.  If either element
dvander@1203
  1118
** is a string then it is converted to a double using the atof()
dvander@1203
  1119
** function before the division.  Division by zero returns NULL.
dvander@1203
  1120
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1121
*/
dvander@1203
  1122
/* Opcode: Remainder * * *
dvander@1203
  1123
**
dvander@1203
  1124
** Pop the top two elements from the stack, divide the
dvander@1203
  1125
** first (what was on top of the stack) from the second (the
dvander@1203
  1126
** next on stack)
dvander@1203
  1127
** and push the remainder after division onto the stack.  If either element
dvander@1203
  1128
** is a string then it is converted to a double using the atof()
dvander@1203
  1129
** function before the division.  Division by zero returns NULL.
dvander@1203
  1130
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1131
*/
dvander@1203
  1132
case OP_Add:                   /* same as TK_PLUS, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1133
case OP_Subtract:              /* same as TK_MINUS, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1134
case OP_Multiply:              /* same as TK_STAR, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1135
case OP_Divide:                /* same as TK_SLASH, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1136
case OP_Remainder: {           /* same as TK_REM, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1137
  Mem *pNos = &pTos[-1];
dvander@1203
  1138
  int flags;
dvander@1203
  1139
  assert( pNos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1140
  flags = pTos->flags | pNos->flags;
dvander@1203
  1141
  if( (flags & MEM_Null)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  1142
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1143
    pTos--;
dvander@1203
  1144
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1145
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  1146
  }else if( (pTos->flags & pNos->flags & MEM_Int)==MEM_Int ){
dvander@1203
  1147
    i64 a, b;
dvander@1203
  1148
    a = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  1149
    b = pNos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  1150
    switch( pOp->opcode ){
dvander@1203
  1151
      case OP_Add:         b += a;       break;
dvander@1203
  1152
      case OP_Subtract:    b -= a;       break;
dvander@1203
  1153
      case OP_Multiply:    b *= a;       break;
dvander@1203
  1154
      case OP_Divide: {
dvander@1203
  1155
        if( a==0 ) goto divide_by_zero;
dvander@1203
  1156
        /* Dividing the largest possible negative 64-bit integer (1<<63) by 
dvander@1203
  1157
        ** -1 returns an integer to large to store in a 64-bit data-type. On
dvander@1203
  1158
        ** some architectures, the value overflows to (1<<63). On others,
dvander@1203
  1159
        ** a SIGFPE is issued. The following statement normalizes this
dvander@1203
  1160
        ** behaviour so that all architectures behave as if integer 
dvander@1203
  1161
        ** overflow occured.
dvander@1203
  1162
        */
dvander@1203
  1163
        if( a==-1 && b==(((i64)1)<<63) ) a = 1;
dvander@1203
  1164
        b /= a;
dvander@1203
  1165
        break;
dvander@1203
  1166
      }
dvander@1203
  1167
      default: {
dvander@1203
  1168
        if( a==0 ) goto divide_by_zero;
dvander@1203
  1169
        if( a==-1 ) a = 1;
dvander@1203
  1170
        b %= a;
dvander@1203
  1171
        break;
dvander@1203
  1172
      }
dvander@1203
  1173
    }
dvander@1203
  1174
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1175
    pTos--;
dvander@1203
  1176
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1177
    pTos->u.i = b;
dvander@1203
  1178
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1179
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1180
    double a, b;
dvander@1203
  1181
    a = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1182
    b = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pNos);
dvander@1203
  1183
    switch( pOp->opcode ){
dvander@1203
  1184
      case OP_Add:         b += a;       break;
dvander@1203
  1185
      case OP_Subtract:    b -= a;       break;
dvander@1203
  1186
      case OP_Multiply:    b *= a;       break;
dvander@1203
  1187
      case OP_Divide: {
dvander@1203
  1188
        if( a==0.0 ) goto divide_by_zero;
dvander@1203
  1189
        b /= a;
dvander@1203
  1190
        break;
dvander@1203
  1191
      }
dvander@1203
  1192
      default: {
dvander@1203
  1193
        i64 ia = (i64)a;
dvander@1203
  1194
        i64 ib = (i64)b;
dvander@1203
  1195
        if( ia==0 ) goto divide_by_zero;
dvander@1203
  1196
        if( ia==-1 ) ia = 1;
dvander@1203
  1197
        b = ib % ia;
dvander@1203
  1198
        break;
dvander@1203
  1199
      }
dvander@1203
  1200
    }
dvander@1203
  1201
    if( sqlite3_isnan(b) ){
dvander@1203
  1202
      goto divide_by_zero;
dvander@1203
  1203
    }
dvander@1203
  1204
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1205
    pTos--;
dvander@1203
  1206
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1207
    pTos->r = b;
dvander@1203
  1208
    pTos->flags = MEM_Real;
dvander@1203
  1209
    if( (flags & MEM_Real)==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1210
      sqlite3VdbeIntegerAffinity(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1211
    }
dvander@1203
  1212
  }
dvander@1203
  1213
  break;
dvander@1203
  1214
dvander@1203
  1215
divide_by_zero:
dvander@1203
  1216
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1217
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  1218
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1219
  pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  1220
  break;
dvander@1203
  1221
}
dvander@1203
  1222
dvander@1203
  1223
/* Opcode: CollSeq * * P3
dvander@1203
  1224
**
dvander@1203
  1225
** P3 is a pointer to a CollSeq struct. If the next call to a user function
dvander@1203
  1226
** or aggregate calls sqlite3GetFuncCollSeq(), this collation sequence will
dvander@1203
  1227
** be returned. This is used by the built-in min(), max() and nullif()
dvander@1203
  1228
** functions.
dvander@1203
  1229
**
dvander@1203
  1230
** The interface used by the implementation of the aforementioned functions
dvander@1203
  1231
** to retrieve the collation sequence set by this opcode is not available
dvander@1203
  1232
** publicly, only to user functions defined in func.c.
dvander@1203
  1233
*/
dvander@1203
  1234
case OP_CollSeq: {             /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1235
  assert( pOp->p3type==P3_COLLSEQ );
dvander@1203
  1236
  break;
dvander@1203
  1237
}
dvander@1203
  1238
dvander@1203
  1239
/* Opcode: Function P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  1240
**
dvander@1203
  1241
** Invoke a user function (P3 is a pointer to a Function structure that
dvander@1203
  1242
** defines the function) with P2 arguments taken from the stack.  Pop all
dvander@1203
  1243
** arguments from the stack and push back the result.
dvander@1203
  1244
**
dvander@1203
  1245
** P1 is a 32-bit bitmask indicating whether or not each argument to the 
dvander@1203
  1246
** function was determined to be constant at compile time. If the first
dvander@1203
  1247
** argument was constant then bit 0 of P1 is set. This is used to determine
dvander@1203
  1248
** whether meta data associated with a user function argument using the
dvander@1203
  1249
** sqlite3_set_auxdata() API may be safely retained until the next
dvander@1203
  1250
** invocation of this opcode.
dvander@1203
  1251
**
dvander@1203
  1252
** See also: AggStep and AggFinal
dvander@1203
  1253
*/
dvander@1203
  1254
case OP_Function: {
dvander@1203
  1255
  int i;
dvander@1203
  1256
  Mem *pArg;
dvander@1203
  1257
  sqlite3_context ctx;
dvander@1203
  1258
  sqlite3_value **apVal;
dvander@1203
  1259
  int n = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  1260
dvander@1203
  1261
  apVal = p->apArg;
dvander@1203
  1262
  assert( apVal || n==0 );
dvander@1203
  1263
dvander@1203
  1264
  pArg = &pTos[1-n];
dvander@1203
  1265
  for(i=0; i<n; i++, pArg++){
dvander@1203
  1266
    apVal[i] = pArg;
dvander@1203
  1267
    storeTypeInfo(pArg, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1268
  }
dvander@1203
  1269
dvander@1203
  1270
  assert( pOp->p3type==P3_FUNCDEF || pOp->p3type==P3_VDBEFUNC );
dvander@1203
  1271
  if( pOp->p3type==P3_FUNCDEF ){
dvander@1203
  1272
    ctx.pFunc = (FuncDef*)pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  1273
    ctx.pVdbeFunc = 0;
dvander@1203
  1274
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1275
    ctx.pVdbeFunc = (VdbeFunc*)pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  1276
    ctx.pFunc = ctx.pVdbeFunc->pFunc;
dvander@1203
  1277
  }
dvander@1203
  1278
dvander@1203
  1279
  ctx.s.flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  1280
  ctx.s.z = 0;
dvander@1203
  1281
  ctx.s.xDel = 0;
dvander@1203
  1282
  ctx.isError = 0;
dvander@1203
  1283
  if( ctx.pFunc->needCollSeq ){
dvander@1203
  1284
    assert( pOp>p->aOp );
dvander@1203
  1285
    assert( pOp[-1].p3type==P3_COLLSEQ );
dvander@1203
  1286
    assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_CollSeq );
dvander@1203
  1287
    ctx.pColl = (CollSeq *)pOp[-1].p3;
dvander@1203
  1288
  }
dvander@1203
  1289
  if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  1290
  (*ctx.pFunc->xFunc)(&ctx, n, apVal);
dvander@1203
  1291
  if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  1292
  if( sqlite3MallocFailed() ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  1293
  popStack(&pTos, n);
dvander@1203
  1294
dvander@1203
  1295
  /* If any auxilary data functions have been called by this user function,
dvander@1203
  1296
  ** immediately call the destructor for any non-static values.
dvander@1203
  1297
  */
dvander@1203
  1298
  if( ctx.pVdbeFunc ){
dvander@1203
  1299
    sqlite3VdbeDeleteAuxData(ctx.pVdbeFunc, pOp->p1);
dvander@1203
  1300
    pOp->p3 = (char *)ctx.pVdbeFunc;
dvander@1203
  1301
    pOp->p3type = P3_VDBEFUNC;
dvander@1203
  1302
  }
dvander@1203
  1303
dvander@1203
  1304
  /* If the function returned an error, throw an exception */
dvander@1203
  1305
  if( ctx.isError ){
dvander@1203
  1306
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, sqlite3_value_text(&ctx.s), (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  1307
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  1308
  }
dvander@1203
  1309
dvander@1203
  1310
  /* Copy the result of the function to the top of the stack */
dvander@1203
  1311
  sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(&ctx.s, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1312
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  1313
  pTos->flags = 0;
dvander@1203
  1314
  sqlite3VdbeMemMove(pTos, &ctx.s);
dvander@1203
  1315
  if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pTos) ){
dvander@1203
  1316
    goto too_big;
dvander@1203
  1317
  }
dvander@1203
  1318
  break;
dvander@1203
  1319
}
dvander@1203
  1320
dvander@1203
  1321
/* Opcode: BitAnd * * *
dvander@1203
  1322
**
dvander@1203
  1323
** Pop the top two elements from the stack.  Convert both elements
dvander@1203
  1324
** to integers.  Push back onto the stack the bit-wise AND of the
dvander@1203
  1325
** two elements.
dvander@1203
  1326
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1327
*/
dvander@1203
  1328
/* Opcode: BitOr * * *
dvander@1203
  1329
**
dvander@1203
  1330
** Pop the top two elements from the stack.  Convert both elements
dvander@1203
  1331
** to integers.  Push back onto the stack the bit-wise OR of the
dvander@1203
  1332
** two elements.
dvander@1203
  1333
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1334
*/
dvander@1203
  1335
/* Opcode: ShiftLeft * * *
dvander@1203
  1336
**
dvander@1203
  1337
** Pop the top two elements from the stack.  Convert both elements
dvander@1203
  1338
** to integers.  Push back onto the stack the second element shifted
dvander@1203
  1339
** left by N bits where N is the top element on the stack.
dvander@1203
  1340
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1341
*/
dvander@1203
  1342
/* Opcode: ShiftRight * * *
dvander@1203
  1343
**
dvander@1203
  1344
** Pop the top two elements from the stack.  Convert both elements
dvander@1203
  1345
** to integers.  Push back onto the stack the second element shifted
dvander@1203
  1346
** right by N bits where N is the top element on the stack.
dvander@1203
  1347
** If either operand is NULL, the result is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1348
*/
dvander@1203
  1349
case OP_BitAnd:                 /* same as TK_BITAND, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1350
case OP_BitOr:                  /* same as TK_BITOR, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1351
case OP_ShiftLeft:              /* same as TK_LSHIFT, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1352
case OP_ShiftRight: {           /* same as TK_RSHIFT, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1353
  Mem *pNos = &pTos[-1];
dvander@1203
  1354
  i64 a, b;
dvander@1203
  1355
dvander@1203
  1356
  assert( pNos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1357
  if( (pTos->flags | pNos->flags) & MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  1358
    popStack(&pTos, 2);
dvander@1203
  1359
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  1360
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  1361
    break;
dvander@1203
  1362
  }
dvander@1203
  1363
  a = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pNos);
dvander@1203
  1364
  b = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1365
  switch( pOp->opcode ){
dvander@1203
  1366
    case OP_BitAnd:      a &= b;     break;
dvander@1203
  1367
    case OP_BitOr:       a |= b;     break;
dvander@1203
  1368
    case OP_ShiftLeft:   a <<= b;    break;
dvander@1203
  1369
    case OP_ShiftRight:  a >>= b;    break;
dvander@1203
  1370
    default:   /* CANT HAPPEN */     break;
dvander@1203
  1371
  }
dvander@1203
  1372
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1373
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  1374
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1375
  pTos->u.i = a;
dvander@1203
  1376
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1377
  break;
dvander@1203
  1378
}
dvander@1203
  1379
dvander@1203
  1380
/* Opcode: AddImm  P1 * *
dvander@1203
  1381
** 
dvander@1203
  1382
** Add the value P1 to whatever is on top of the stack.  The result
dvander@1203
  1383
** is always an integer.
dvander@1203
  1384
**
dvander@1203
  1385
** To force the top of the stack to be an integer, just add 0.
dvander@1203
  1386
*/
dvander@1203
  1387
case OP_AddImm: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1388
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1389
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1390
  pTos->u.i += pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  1391
  break;
dvander@1203
  1392
}
dvander@1203
  1393
dvander@1203
  1394
/* Opcode: ForceInt P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  1395
**
dvander@1203
  1396
** Convert the top of the stack into an integer.  If the current top of
dvander@1203
  1397
** the stack is not numeric (meaning that is is a NULL or a string that
dvander@1203
  1398
** does not look like an integer or floating point number) then pop the
dvander@1203
  1399
** stack and jump to P2.  If the top of the stack is numeric then
dvander@1203
  1400
** convert it into the least integer that is greater than or equal to its
dvander@1203
  1401
** current value if P1==0, or to the least integer that is strictly
dvander@1203
  1402
** greater than its current value if P1==1.
dvander@1203
  1403
*/
dvander@1203
  1404
case OP_ForceInt: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1405
  i64 v;
dvander@1203
  1406
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1407
  applyAffinity(pTos, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1408
  if( (pTos->flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Real))==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1409
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1410
    pTos--;
dvander@1203
  1411
    pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  1412
    break;
dvander@1203
  1413
  }
dvander@1203
  1414
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Int ){
dvander@1203
  1415
    v = pTos->u.i + (pOp->p1!=0);
dvander@1203
  1416
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1417
    /* FIX ME:  should this not be assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Real ) ??? */
dvander@1203
  1418
    sqlite3VdbeMemRealify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1419
    v = (int)pTos->r;
dvander@1203
  1420
    if( pTos->r>(double)v ) v++;
dvander@1203
  1421
    if( pOp->p1 && pTos->r==(double)v ) v++;
dvander@1203
  1422
  }
dvander@1203
  1423
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1424
  pTos->u.i = v;
dvander@1203
  1425
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1426
  break;
dvander@1203
  1427
}
dvander@1203
  1428
dvander@1203
  1429
/* Opcode: MustBeInt P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  1430
** 
dvander@1203
  1431
** Force the top of the stack to be an integer.  If the top of the
dvander@1203
  1432
** stack is not an integer and cannot be converted into an integer
dvander@1203
  1433
** with out data loss, then jump immediately to P2, or if P2==0
dvander@1203
  1434
** raise an SQLITE_MISMATCH exception.
dvander@1203
  1435
**
dvander@1203
  1436
** If the top of the stack is not an integer and P2 is not zero and
dvander@1203
  1437
** P1 is 1, then the stack is popped.  In all other cases, the depth
dvander@1203
  1438
** of the stack is unchanged.
dvander@1203
  1439
*/
dvander@1203
  1440
case OP_MustBeInt: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1441
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1442
  applyAffinity(pTos, SQLITE_AFF_NUMERIC, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1443
  if( (pTos->flags & MEM_Int)==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1444
    if( pOp->p2==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1445
      rc = SQLITE_MISMATCH;
dvander@1203
  1446
      goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  1447
    }else{
dvander@1203
  1448
      if( pOp->p1 ) popStack(&pTos, 1);
dvander@1203
  1449
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  1450
    }
dvander@1203
  1451
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1452
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1453
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1454
  }
dvander@1203
  1455
  break;
dvander@1203
  1456
}
dvander@1203
  1457
dvander@1203
  1458
/* Opcode: RealAffinity * * *
dvander@1203
  1459
**
dvander@1203
  1460
** If the top of the stack is an integer, convert it to a real value.
dvander@1203
  1461
**
dvander@1203
  1462
** This opcode is used when extracting information from a column that
dvander@1203
  1463
** has REAL affinity.  Such column values may still be stored as
dvander@1203
  1464
** integers, for space efficiency, but after extraction we want them
dvander@1203
  1465
** to have only a real value.
dvander@1203
  1466
*/
dvander@1203
  1467
case OP_RealAffinity: {                  /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1468
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1469
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Int ){
dvander@1203
  1470
    sqlite3VdbeMemRealify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1471
  }
dvander@1203
  1472
  break;
dvander@1203
  1473
}
dvander@1203
  1474
dvander@1203
  1475
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CAST
dvander@1203
  1476
/* Opcode: ToText * * *
dvander@1203
  1477
**
dvander@1203
  1478
** Force the value on the top of the stack to be text.
dvander@1203
  1479
** If the value is numeric, convert it to a string using the
dvander@1203
  1480
** equivalent of printf().  Blob values are unchanged and
dvander@1203
  1481
** are afterwards simply interpreted as text.
dvander@1203
  1482
**
dvander@1203
  1483
** A NULL value is not changed by this routine.  It remains NULL.
dvander@1203
  1484
*/
dvander@1203
  1485
case OP_ToText: {                  /* same as TK_TO_TEXT, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1486
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1487
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Null ) break;
dvander@1203
  1488
  assert( MEM_Str==(MEM_Blob>>3) );
dvander@1203
  1489
  pTos->flags |= (pTos->flags&MEM_Blob)>>3;
dvander@1203
  1490
  applyAffinity(pTos, SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1491
  rc = ExpandBlob(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1492
  assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Str );
dvander@1203
  1493
  pTos->flags &= ~(MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Blob);
dvander@1203
  1494
  break;
dvander@1203
  1495
}
dvander@1203
  1496
dvander@1203
  1497
/* Opcode: ToBlob * * *
dvander@1203
  1498
**
dvander@1203
  1499
** Force the value on the top of the stack to be a BLOB.
dvander@1203
  1500
** If the value is numeric, convert it to a string first.
dvander@1203
  1501
** Strings are simply reinterpreted as blobs with no change
dvander@1203
  1502
** to the underlying data.
dvander@1203
  1503
**
dvander@1203
  1504
** A NULL value is not changed by this routine.  It remains NULL.
dvander@1203
  1505
*/
dvander@1203
  1506
case OP_ToBlob: {                  /* same as TK_TO_BLOB, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1507
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1508
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Null ) break;
dvander@1203
  1509
  if( (pTos->flags & MEM_Blob)==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1510
    applyAffinity(pTos, SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1511
    assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Str );
dvander@1203
  1512
    pTos->flags |= MEM_Blob;
dvander@1203
  1513
  }
dvander@1203
  1514
  pTos->flags &= ~(MEM_Int|MEM_Real|MEM_Str);
dvander@1203
  1515
  break;
dvander@1203
  1516
}
dvander@1203
  1517
dvander@1203
  1518
/* Opcode: ToNumeric * * *
dvander@1203
  1519
**
dvander@1203
  1520
** Force the value on the top of the stack to be numeric (either an
dvander@1203
  1521
** integer or a floating-point number.)
dvander@1203
  1522
** If the value is text or blob, try to convert it to an using the
dvander@1203
  1523
** equivalent of atoi() or atof() and store 0 if no such conversion 
dvander@1203
  1524
** is possible.
dvander@1203
  1525
**
dvander@1203
  1526
** A NULL value is not changed by this routine.  It remains NULL.
dvander@1203
  1527
*/
dvander@1203
  1528
case OP_ToNumeric: {                  /* same as TK_TO_NUMERIC, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1529
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1530
  if( (pTos->flags & (MEM_Null|MEM_Int|MEM_Real))==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1531
    sqlite3VdbeMemNumerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1532
  }
dvander@1203
  1533
  break;
dvander@1203
  1534
}
dvander@1203
  1535
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_CAST */
dvander@1203
  1536
dvander@1203
  1537
/* Opcode: ToInt * * *
dvander@1203
  1538
**
dvander@1203
  1539
** Force the value on the top of the stack to be an integer.  If
dvander@1203
  1540
** The value is currently a real number, drop its fractional part.
dvander@1203
  1541
** If the value is text or blob, try to convert it to an integer using the
dvander@1203
  1542
** equivalent of atoi() and store 0 if no such conversion is possible.
dvander@1203
  1543
**
dvander@1203
  1544
** A NULL value is not changed by this routine.  It remains NULL.
dvander@1203
  1545
*/
dvander@1203
  1546
case OP_ToInt: {                  /* same as TK_TO_INT, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1547
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1548
  if( (pTos->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1549
    sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1550
  }
dvander@1203
  1551
  break;
dvander@1203
  1552
}
dvander@1203
  1553
dvander@1203
  1554
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_CAST
dvander@1203
  1555
/* Opcode: ToReal * * *
dvander@1203
  1556
**
dvander@1203
  1557
** Force the value on the top of the stack to be a floating point number.
dvander@1203
  1558
** If The value is currently an integer, convert it.
dvander@1203
  1559
** If the value is text or blob, try to convert it to an integer using the
dvander@1203
  1560
** equivalent of atoi() and store 0 if no such conversion is possible.
dvander@1203
  1561
**
dvander@1203
  1562
** A NULL value is not changed by this routine.  It remains NULL.
dvander@1203
  1563
*/
dvander@1203
  1564
case OP_ToReal: {                  /* same as TK_TO_REAL, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1565
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1566
  if( (pTos->flags & MEM_Null)==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1567
    sqlite3VdbeMemRealify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1568
  }
dvander@1203
  1569
  break;
dvander@1203
  1570
}
dvander@1203
  1571
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_CAST */
dvander@1203
  1572
dvander@1203
  1573
/* Opcode: Eq P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  1574
**
dvander@1203
  1575
** Pop the top two elements from the stack.  If they are equal, then
dvander@1203
  1576
** jump to instruction P2.  Otherwise, continue to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  1577
**
dvander@1203
  1578
** If the 0x100 bit of P1 is true and either operand is NULL then take the
dvander@1203
  1579
** jump.  If the 0x100 bit of P1 is clear then fall thru if either operand
dvander@1203
  1580
** is NULL.
dvander@1203
  1581
**
dvander@1203
  1582
** If the 0x200 bit of P1 is set and either operand is NULL then
dvander@1203
  1583
** both operands are converted to integers prior to comparison.
dvander@1203
  1584
** NULL operands are converted to zero and non-NULL operands are
dvander@1203
  1585
** converted to 1.  Thus, for example, with 0x200 set,  NULL==NULL is true
dvander@1203
  1586
** whereas it would normally be NULL.  Similarly,  NULL==123 is false when
dvander@1203
  1587
** 0x200 is set but is NULL when the 0x200 bit of P1 is clear.
dvander@1203
  1588
**
dvander@1203
  1589
** The least significant byte of P1 (mask 0xff) must be an affinity character -
dvander@1203
  1590
** SQLITE_AFF_TEXT, SQLITE_AFF_INTEGER, and so forth. An attempt is made 
dvander@1203
  1591
** to coerce both values
dvander@1203
  1592
** according to the affinity before the comparison is made. If the byte is
dvander@1203
  1593
** 0x00, then numeric affinity is used.
dvander@1203
  1594
**
dvander@1203
  1595
** Once any conversions have taken place, and neither value is NULL, 
dvander@1203
  1596
** the values are compared. If both values are blobs, or both are text,
dvander@1203
  1597
** then memcmp() is used to determine the results of the comparison. If
dvander@1203
  1598
** both values are numeric, then a numeric comparison is used. If the
dvander@1203
  1599
** two values are of different types, then they are inequal.
dvander@1203
  1600
**
dvander@1203
  1601
** If P2 is zero, do not jump.  Instead, push an integer 1 onto the
dvander@1203
  1602
** stack if the jump would have been taken, or a 0 if not.  Push a
dvander@1203
  1603
** NULL if either operand was NULL.
dvander@1203
  1604
**
dvander@1203
  1605
** If P3 is not NULL it is a pointer to a collating sequence (a CollSeq
dvander@1203
  1606
** structure) that defines how to compare text.
dvander@1203
  1607
*/
dvander@1203
  1608
/* Opcode: Ne P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  1609
**
dvander@1203
  1610
** This works just like the Eq opcode except that the jump is taken if
dvander@1203
  1611
** the operands from the stack are not equal.  See the Eq opcode for
dvander@1203
  1612
** additional information.
dvander@1203
  1613
*/
dvander@1203
  1614
/* Opcode: Lt P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  1615
**
dvander@1203
  1616
** This works just like the Eq opcode except that the jump is taken if
dvander@1203
  1617
** the 2nd element down on the stack is less than the top of the stack.
dvander@1203
  1618
** See the Eq opcode for additional information.
dvander@1203
  1619
*/
dvander@1203
  1620
/* Opcode: Le P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  1621
**
dvander@1203
  1622
** This works just like the Eq opcode except that the jump is taken if
dvander@1203
  1623
** the 2nd element down on the stack is less than or equal to the
dvander@1203
  1624
** top of the stack.  See the Eq opcode for additional information.
dvander@1203
  1625
*/
dvander@1203
  1626
/* Opcode: Gt P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  1627
**
dvander@1203
  1628
** This works just like the Eq opcode except that the jump is taken if
dvander@1203
  1629
** the 2nd element down on the stack is greater than the top of the stack.
dvander@1203
  1630
** See the Eq opcode for additional information.
dvander@1203
  1631
*/
dvander@1203
  1632
/* Opcode: Ge P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  1633
**
dvander@1203
  1634
** This works just like the Eq opcode except that the jump is taken if
dvander@1203
  1635
** the 2nd element down on the stack is greater than or equal to the
dvander@1203
  1636
** top of the stack.  See the Eq opcode for additional information.
dvander@1203
  1637
*/
dvander@1203
  1638
case OP_Eq:               /* same as TK_EQ, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1639
case OP_Ne:               /* same as TK_NE, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1640
case OP_Lt:               /* same as TK_LT, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1641
case OP_Le:               /* same as TK_LE, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1642
case OP_Gt:               /* same as TK_GT, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1643
case OP_Ge: {             /* same as TK_GE, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1644
  Mem *pNos;
dvander@1203
  1645
  int flags;
dvander@1203
  1646
  int res;
dvander@1203
  1647
  char affinity;
dvander@1203
  1648
dvander@1203
  1649
  pNos = &pTos[-1];
dvander@1203
  1650
  flags = pTos->flags|pNos->flags;
dvander@1203
  1651
dvander@1203
  1652
  /* If either value is a NULL P2 is not zero, take the jump if the least
dvander@1203
  1653
  ** significant byte of P1 is true. If P2 is zero, then push a NULL onto
dvander@1203
  1654
  ** the stack.
dvander@1203
  1655
  */
dvander@1203
  1656
  if( flags&MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  1657
    if( (pOp->p1 & 0x200)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  1658
      /* The 0x200 bit of P1 means, roughly "do not treat NULL as the
dvander@1203
  1659
      ** magic SQL value it normally is - treat it as if it were another
dvander@1203
  1660
      ** integer".
dvander@1203
  1661
      **
dvander@1203
  1662
      ** With 0x200 set, if either operand is NULL then both operands
dvander@1203
  1663
      ** are converted to integers prior to being passed down into the
dvander@1203
  1664
      ** normal comparison logic below.  NULL operands are converted to
dvander@1203
  1665
      ** zero and non-NULL operands are converted to 1.  Thus, for example,
dvander@1203
  1666
      ** with 0x200 set,  NULL==NULL is true whereas it would normally
dvander@1203
  1667
      ** be NULL.  Similarly,  NULL!=123 is true.
dvander@1203
  1668
      */
dvander@1203
  1669
      sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pTos, (pTos->flags & MEM_Null)==0);
dvander@1203
  1670
      sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(pNos, (pNos->flags & MEM_Null)==0);
dvander@1203
  1671
    }else{
dvander@1203
  1672
      /* If the 0x200 bit of P1 is clear and either operand is NULL then
dvander@1203
  1673
      ** the result is always NULL.  The jump is taken if the 0x100 bit
dvander@1203
  1674
      ** of P1 is set.
dvander@1203
  1675
      */
dvander@1203
  1676
      popStack(&pTos, 2);
dvander@1203
  1677
      if( pOp->p2 ){
dvander@1203
  1678
        if( pOp->p1 & 0x100 ){
dvander@1203
  1679
          pc = pOp->p2-1;
dvander@1203
  1680
        }
dvander@1203
  1681
      }else{
dvander@1203
  1682
        pTos++;
dvander@1203
  1683
        pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  1684
      }
dvander@1203
  1685
      break;
dvander@1203
  1686
    }
dvander@1203
  1687
  }
dvander@1203
  1688
dvander@1203
  1689
  affinity = pOp->p1 & 0xFF;
dvander@1203
  1690
  if( affinity ){
dvander@1203
  1691
    applyAffinity(pNos, affinity, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1692
    applyAffinity(pTos, affinity, encoding);
dvander@1203
  1693
  }
dvander@1203
  1694
dvander@1203
  1695
  assert( pOp->p3type==P3_COLLSEQ || pOp->p3==0 );
dvander@1203
  1696
  ExpandBlob(pNos);
dvander@1203
  1697
  ExpandBlob(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1698
  res = sqlite3MemCompare(pNos, pTos, (CollSeq*)pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  1699
  switch( pOp->opcode ){
dvander@1203
  1700
    case OP_Eq:    res = res==0;     break;
dvander@1203
  1701
    case OP_Ne:    res = res!=0;     break;
dvander@1203
  1702
    case OP_Lt:    res = res<0;      break;
dvander@1203
  1703
    case OP_Le:    res = res<=0;     break;
dvander@1203
  1704
    case OP_Gt:    res = res>0;      break;
dvander@1203
  1705
    default:       res = res>=0;     break;
dvander@1203
  1706
  }
dvander@1203
  1707
dvander@1203
  1708
  popStack(&pTos, 2);
dvander@1203
  1709
  if( pOp->p2 ){
dvander@1203
  1710
    if( res ){
dvander@1203
  1711
      pc = pOp->p2-1;
dvander@1203
  1712
    }
dvander@1203
  1713
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1714
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  1715
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1716
    pTos->u.i = res;
dvander@1203
  1717
  }
dvander@1203
  1718
  break;
dvander@1203
  1719
}
dvander@1203
  1720
dvander@1203
  1721
/* Opcode: And * * *
dvander@1203
  1722
**
dvander@1203
  1723
** Pop two values off the stack.  Take the logical AND of the
dvander@1203
  1724
** two values and push the resulting boolean value back onto the
dvander@1203
  1725
** stack. 
dvander@1203
  1726
*/
dvander@1203
  1727
/* Opcode: Or * * *
dvander@1203
  1728
**
dvander@1203
  1729
** Pop two values off the stack.  Take the logical OR of the
dvander@1203
  1730
** two values and push the resulting boolean value back onto the
dvander@1203
  1731
** stack. 
dvander@1203
  1732
*/
dvander@1203
  1733
case OP_And:              /* same as TK_AND, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1734
case OP_Or: {             /* same as TK_OR, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1735
  Mem *pNos = &pTos[-1];
dvander@1203
  1736
  int v1, v2;    /* 0==TRUE, 1==FALSE, 2==UNKNOWN or NULL */
dvander@1203
  1737
dvander@1203
  1738
  assert( pNos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1739
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  1740
    v1 = 2;
dvander@1203
  1741
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1742
    sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1743
    v1 = pTos->u.i==0;
dvander@1203
  1744
  }
dvander@1203
  1745
  if( pNos->flags & MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  1746
    v2 = 2;
dvander@1203
  1747
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1748
    sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pNos);
dvander@1203
  1749
    v2 = pNos->u.i==0;
dvander@1203
  1750
  }
dvander@1203
  1751
  if( pOp->opcode==OP_And ){
dvander@1203
  1752
    static const unsigned char and_logic[] = { 0, 1, 2, 1, 1, 1, 2, 1, 2 };
dvander@1203
  1753
    v1 = and_logic[v1*3+v2];
dvander@1203
  1754
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1755
    static const unsigned char or_logic[] = { 0, 0, 0, 0, 1, 2, 0, 2, 2 };
dvander@1203
  1756
    v1 = or_logic[v1*3+v2];
dvander@1203
  1757
  }
dvander@1203
  1758
  popStack(&pTos, 2);
dvander@1203
  1759
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  1760
  if( v1==2 ){
dvander@1203
  1761
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  1762
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1763
    pTos->u.i = v1==0;
dvander@1203
  1764
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1765
  }
dvander@1203
  1766
  break;
dvander@1203
  1767
}
dvander@1203
  1768
dvander@1203
  1769
/* Opcode: Negative * * *
dvander@1203
  1770
**
dvander@1203
  1771
** Treat the top of the stack as a numeric quantity.  Replace it
dvander@1203
  1772
** with its additive inverse.  If the top of the stack is NULL
dvander@1203
  1773
** its value is unchanged.
dvander@1203
  1774
*/
dvander@1203
  1775
/* Opcode: AbsValue * * *
dvander@1203
  1776
**
dvander@1203
  1777
** Treat the top of the stack as a numeric quantity.  Replace it
dvander@1203
  1778
** with its absolute value. If the top of the stack is NULL
dvander@1203
  1779
** its value is unchanged.
dvander@1203
  1780
*/
dvander@1203
  1781
case OP_Negative:              /* same as TK_UMINUS, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1782
case OP_AbsValue: {
dvander@1203
  1783
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1784
  if( (pTos->flags & (MEM_Real|MEM_Int|MEM_Null))==0 ){
dvander@1203
  1785
    sqlite3VdbeMemNumerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1786
  }
dvander@1203
  1787
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Real ){
dvander@1203
  1788
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1789
    if( pOp->opcode==OP_Negative || pTos->r<0.0 ){
dvander@1203
  1790
      pTos->r = -pTos->r;
dvander@1203
  1791
    }
dvander@1203
  1792
    pTos->flags = MEM_Real;
dvander@1203
  1793
  }else if( pTos->flags & MEM_Int ){
dvander@1203
  1794
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1795
    if( pOp->opcode==OP_Negative || pTos->u.i<0 ){
dvander@1203
  1796
      pTos->u.i = -pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  1797
    }
dvander@1203
  1798
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1799
  }
dvander@1203
  1800
  break;
dvander@1203
  1801
}
dvander@1203
  1802
dvander@1203
  1803
/* Opcode: Not * * *
dvander@1203
  1804
**
dvander@1203
  1805
** Interpret the top of the stack as a boolean value.  Replace it
dvander@1203
  1806
** with its complement.  If the top of the stack is NULL its value
dvander@1203
  1807
** is unchanged.
dvander@1203
  1808
*/
dvander@1203
  1809
case OP_Not: {                /* same as TK_NOT, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1810
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1811
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Null ) break;  /* Do nothing to NULLs */
dvander@1203
  1812
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1813
  assert( (pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 );
dvander@1203
  1814
  pTos->u.i = !pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  1815
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1816
  break;
dvander@1203
  1817
}
dvander@1203
  1818
dvander@1203
  1819
/* Opcode: BitNot * * *
dvander@1203
  1820
**
dvander@1203
  1821
** Interpret the top of the stack as an value.  Replace it
dvander@1203
  1822
** with its ones-complement.  If the top of the stack is NULL its
dvander@1203
  1823
** value is unchanged.
dvander@1203
  1824
*/
dvander@1203
  1825
case OP_BitNot: {             /* same as TK_BITNOT, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1826
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1827
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Null ) break;  /* Do nothing to NULLs */
dvander@1203
  1828
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1829
  assert( (pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 );
dvander@1203
  1830
  pTos->u.i = ~pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  1831
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  1832
  break;
dvander@1203
  1833
}
dvander@1203
  1834
dvander@1203
  1835
/* Opcode: Noop * * *
dvander@1203
  1836
**
dvander@1203
  1837
** Do nothing.  This instruction is often useful as a jump
dvander@1203
  1838
** destination.
dvander@1203
  1839
*/
dvander@1203
  1840
/*
dvander@1203
  1841
** The magic Explain opcode are only inserted when explain==2 (which
dvander@1203
  1842
** is to say when the EXPLAIN QUERY PLAN syntax is used.)
dvander@1203
  1843
** This opcode records information from the optimizer.  It is the
dvander@1203
  1844
** the same as a no-op.  This opcodesnever appears in a real VM program.
dvander@1203
  1845
*/
dvander@1203
  1846
case OP_Explain:
dvander@1203
  1847
case OP_Noop: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1848
  break;
dvander@1203
  1849
}
dvander@1203
  1850
dvander@1203
  1851
/* Opcode: If P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  1852
**
dvander@1203
  1853
** Pop a single boolean from the stack.  If the boolean popped is
dvander@1203
  1854
** true, then jump to p2.  Otherwise continue to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  1855
** An integer is false if zero and true otherwise.  A string is
dvander@1203
  1856
** false if it has zero length and true otherwise.
dvander@1203
  1857
**
dvander@1203
  1858
** If the value popped of the stack is NULL, then take the jump if P1
dvander@1203
  1859
** is true and fall through if P1 is false.
dvander@1203
  1860
*/
dvander@1203
  1861
/* Opcode: IfNot P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  1862
**
dvander@1203
  1863
** Pop a single boolean from the stack.  If the boolean popped is
dvander@1203
  1864
** false, then jump to p2.  Otherwise continue to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  1865
** An integer is false if zero and true otherwise.  A string is
dvander@1203
  1866
** false if it has zero length and true otherwise.
dvander@1203
  1867
**
dvander@1203
  1868
** If the value popped of the stack is NULL, then take the jump if P1
dvander@1203
  1869
** is true and fall through if P1 is false.
dvander@1203
  1870
*/
dvander@1203
  1871
case OP_If:                 /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1872
case OP_IfNot: {            /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1873
  int c;
dvander@1203
  1874
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1875
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  1876
    c = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  1877
  }else{
dvander@1203
  1878
#ifdef SQLITE_OMIT_FLOATING_POINT
dvander@1203
  1879
    c = sqlite3VdbeIntValue(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1880
#else
dvander@1203
  1881
    c = sqlite3VdbeRealValue(pTos)!=0.0;
dvander@1203
  1882
#endif
dvander@1203
  1883
    if( pOp->opcode==OP_IfNot ) c = !c;
dvander@1203
  1884
  }
dvander@1203
  1885
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  1886
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  1887
  if( c ) pc = pOp->p2-1;
dvander@1203
  1888
  break;
dvander@1203
  1889
}
dvander@1203
  1890
dvander@1203
  1891
/* Opcode: IsNull P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  1892
**
dvander@1203
  1893
** Check the top of the stack and jump to P2 if the top of the stack
dvander@1203
  1894
** is NULL.  If P1 is positive, then pop P1 elements from the stack
dvander@1203
  1895
** regardless of whether or not the jump is taken.  If P1 is negative,
dvander@1203
  1896
** pop -P1 elements from the stack only if the jump is taken and leave
dvander@1203
  1897
** the stack unchanged if the jump is not taken.
dvander@1203
  1898
*/
dvander@1203
  1899
case OP_IsNull: {            /* same as TK_ISNULL, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1900
  if( pTos->flags & MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  1901
    pc = pOp->p2-1;
dvander@1203
  1902
    if( pOp->p1<0 ){
dvander@1203
  1903
      popStack(&pTos, -pOp->p1);
dvander@1203
  1904
    }
dvander@1203
  1905
  }
dvander@1203
  1906
  if( pOp->p1>0 ){
dvander@1203
  1907
    popStack(&pTos, pOp->p1);
dvander@1203
  1908
  }
dvander@1203
  1909
  break;
dvander@1203
  1910
}
dvander@1203
  1911
dvander@1203
  1912
/* Opcode: NotNull P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  1913
**
dvander@1203
  1914
** Jump to P2 if the top abs(P1) values on the stack are all not NULL.  
dvander@1203
  1915
** Regardless of whether or not the jump is taken, pop the stack
dvander@1203
  1916
** P1 times if P1 is greater than zero.  But if P1 is negative,
dvander@1203
  1917
** leave the stack unchanged.
dvander@1203
  1918
*/
dvander@1203
  1919
case OP_NotNull: {            /* same as TK_NOTNULL, no-push */
dvander@1203
  1920
  int i, cnt;
dvander@1203
  1921
  cnt = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  1922
  if( cnt<0 ) cnt = -cnt;
dvander@1203
  1923
  assert( &pTos[1-cnt] >= p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  1924
  for(i=0; i<cnt && (pTos[1+i-cnt].flags & MEM_Null)==0; i++){}
dvander@1203
  1925
  if( i>=cnt ) pc = pOp->p2-1;
dvander@1203
  1926
  if( pOp->p1>0 ) popStack(&pTos, cnt);
dvander@1203
  1927
  break;
dvander@1203
  1928
}
dvander@1203
  1929
dvander@1203
  1930
/* Opcode: SetNumColumns P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  1931
**
dvander@1203
  1932
** Before the OP_Column opcode can be executed on a cursor, this
dvander@1203
  1933
** opcode must be called to set the number of fields in the table.
dvander@1203
  1934
**
dvander@1203
  1935
** This opcode sets the number of columns for cursor P1 to P2.
dvander@1203
  1936
**
dvander@1203
  1937
** If OP_KeyAsData is to be applied to cursor P1, it must be executed
dvander@1203
  1938
** before this op-code.
dvander@1203
  1939
*/
dvander@1203
  1940
case OP_SetNumColumns: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  1941
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  1942
  assert( (pOp->p1)<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  1943
  assert( p->apCsr[pOp->p1]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  1944
  pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  1945
  pC->nField = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  1946
  break;
dvander@1203
  1947
}
dvander@1203
  1948
dvander@1203
  1949
/* Opcode: Column P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  1950
**
dvander@1203
  1951
** Interpret the data that cursor P1 points to as a structure built using
dvander@1203
  1952
** the MakeRecord instruction.  (See the MakeRecord opcode for additional
dvander@1203
  1953
** information about the format of the data.) Push onto the stack the value
dvander@1203
  1954
** of the P2-th column contained in the data. If there are less that (P2+1) 
dvander@1203
  1955
** values in the record, push a NULL onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  1956
**
dvander@1203
  1957
** If the KeyAsData opcode has previously executed on this cursor, then the
dvander@1203
  1958
** field might be extracted from the key rather than the data.
dvander@1203
  1959
**
dvander@1203
  1960
** If the column contains fewer than P2 fields, then push a NULL.  Or
dvander@1203
  1961
** if P3 is of type P3_MEM, then push the P3 value.  The P3 value will
dvander@1203
  1962
** be default value for a column that has been added using the ALTER TABLE
dvander@1203
  1963
** ADD COLUMN command.  If P3 is an ordinary string, just push a NULL.
dvander@1203
  1964
** When P3 is a string it is really just a comment describing the value
dvander@1203
  1965
** to be pushed, not a default value.
dvander@1203
  1966
*/
dvander@1203
  1967
case OP_Column: {
dvander@1203
  1968
  u32 payloadSize;   /* Number of bytes in the record */
dvander@1203
  1969
  int p1 = pOp->p1;  /* P1 value of the opcode */
dvander@1203
  1970
  int p2 = pOp->p2;  /* column number to retrieve */
dvander@1203
  1971
  Cursor *pC = 0;    /* The VDBE cursor */
dvander@1203
  1972
  char *zRec;        /* Pointer to complete record-data */
dvander@1203
  1973
  BtCursor *pCrsr;   /* The BTree cursor */
dvander@1203
  1974
  u32 *aType;        /* aType[i] holds the numeric type of the i-th column */
dvander@1203
  1975
  u32 *aOffset;      /* aOffset[i] is offset to start of data for i-th column */
dvander@1203
  1976
  u32 nField;        /* number of fields in the record */
dvander@1203
  1977
  int len;           /* The length of the serialized data for the column */
dvander@1203
  1978
  int i;             /* Loop counter */
dvander@1203
  1979
  char *zData;       /* Part of the record being decoded */
dvander@1203
  1980
  Mem sMem;          /* For storing the record being decoded */
dvander@1203
  1981
dvander@1203
  1982
  sMem.flags = 0;
dvander@1203
  1983
  assert( p1<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  1984
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  1985
  pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  1986
dvander@1203
  1987
  /* This block sets the variable payloadSize to be the total number of
dvander@1203
  1988
  ** bytes in the record.
dvander@1203
  1989
  **
dvander@1203
  1990
  ** zRec is set to be the complete text of the record if it is available.
dvander@1203
  1991
  ** The complete record text is always available for pseudo-tables
dvander@1203
  1992
  ** If the record is stored in a cursor, the complete record text
dvander@1203
  1993
  ** might be available in the  pC->aRow cache.  Or it might not be.
dvander@1203
  1994
  ** If the data is unavailable,  zRec is set to NULL.
dvander@1203
  1995
  **
dvander@1203
  1996
  ** We also compute the number of columns in the record.  For cursors,
dvander@1203
  1997
  ** the number of columns is stored in the Cursor.nField element.  For
dvander@1203
  1998
  ** records on the stack, the next entry down on the stack is an integer
dvander@1203
  1999
  ** which is the number of records.
dvander@1203
  2000
  */
dvander@1203
  2001
  pC = p->apCsr[p1];
dvander@1203
  2002
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  2003
  assert( pC->pVtabCursor==0 );
dvander@1203
  2004
#endif
dvander@1203
  2005
  assert( pC!=0 );
dvander@1203
  2006
  if( pC->pCursor!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  2007
    /* The record is stored in a B-Tree */
dvander@1203
  2008
    rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(pC);
dvander@1203
  2009
    if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2010
    zRec = 0;
dvander@1203
  2011
    pCrsr = pC->pCursor;
dvander@1203
  2012
    if( pC->nullRow ){
dvander@1203
  2013
      payloadSize = 0;
dvander@1203
  2014
    }else if( pC->cacheStatus==p->cacheCtr ){
dvander@1203
  2015
      payloadSize = pC->payloadSize;
dvander@1203
  2016
      zRec = (char*)pC->aRow;
dvander@1203
  2017
    }else if( pC->isIndex ){
dvander@1203
  2018
      i64 payloadSize64;
dvander@1203
  2019
      sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pCrsr, &payloadSize64);
dvander@1203
  2020
      payloadSize = payloadSize64;
dvander@1203
  2021
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2022
      sqlite3BtreeDataSize(pCrsr, &payloadSize);
dvander@1203
  2023
    }
dvander@1203
  2024
    nField = pC->nField;
dvander@1203
  2025
  }else if( pC->pseudoTable ){
dvander@1203
  2026
    /* The record is the sole entry of a pseudo-table */
dvander@1203
  2027
    payloadSize = pC->nData;
dvander@1203
  2028
    zRec = pC->pData;
dvander@1203
  2029
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  2030
    assert( payloadSize==0 || zRec!=0 );
dvander@1203
  2031
    nField = pC->nField;
dvander@1203
  2032
    pCrsr = 0;
dvander@1203
  2033
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2034
    zRec = 0;
dvander@1203
  2035
    payloadSize = 0;
dvander@1203
  2036
    pCrsr = 0;
dvander@1203
  2037
    nField = 0;
dvander@1203
  2038
  }
dvander@1203
  2039
dvander@1203
  2040
  /* If payloadSize is 0, then just push a NULL onto the stack. */
dvander@1203
  2041
  if( payloadSize==0 ){
dvander@1203
  2042
    assert( pTos->flags==MEM_Null );
dvander@1203
  2043
    break;
dvander@1203
  2044
  }
dvander@1203
  2045
  if( payloadSize>SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ){
dvander@1203
  2046
    goto too_big;
dvander@1203
  2047
  }
dvander@1203
  2048
dvander@1203
  2049
  assert( p2<nField );
dvander@1203
  2050
dvander@1203
  2051
  /* Read and parse the table header.  Store the results of the parse
dvander@1203
  2052
  ** into the record header cache fields of the cursor.
dvander@1203
  2053
  */
dvander@1203
  2054
  if( pC && pC->cacheStatus==p->cacheCtr ){
dvander@1203
  2055
    aType = pC->aType;
dvander@1203
  2056
    aOffset = pC->aOffset;
dvander@1203
  2057
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2058
    u8 *zIdx;        /* Index into header */
dvander@1203
  2059
    u8 *zEndHdr;     /* Pointer to first byte after the header */
dvander@1203
  2060
    u32 offset;      /* Offset into the data */
dvander@1203
  2061
    int szHdrSz;     /* Size of the header size field at start of record */
dvander@1203
  2062
    int avail;       /* Number of bytes of available data */
dvander@1203
  2063
dvander@1203
  2064
    aType = pC->aType;
dvander@1203
  2065
    if( aType==0 ){
dvander@1203
  2066
      pC->aType = aType = sqliteMallocRaw( 2*nField*sizeof(aType) );
dvander@1203
  2067
    }
dvander@1203
  2068
    if( aType==0 ){
dvander@1203
  2069
      goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  2070
    }
dvander@1203
  2071
    pC->aOffset = aOffset = &aType[nField];
dvander@1203
  2072
    pC->payloadSize = payloadSize;
dvander@1203
  2073
    pC->cacheStatus = p->cacheCtr;
dvander@1203
  2074
dvander@1203
  2075
    /* Figure out how many bytes are in the header */
dvander@1203
  2076
    if( zRec ){
dvander@1203
  2077
      zData = zRec;
dvander@1203
  2078
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2079
      if( pC->isIndex ){
dvander@1203
  2080
        zData = (char*)sqlite3BtreeKeyFetch(pCrsr, &avail);
dvander@1203
  2081
      }else{
dvander@1203
  2082
        zData = (char*)sqlite3BtreeDataFetch(pCrsr, &avail);
dvander@1203
  2083
      }
dvander@1203
  2084
      /* If KeyFetch()/DataFetch() managed to get the entire payload,
dvander@1203
  2085
      ** save the payload in the pC->aRow cache.  That will save us from
dvander@1203
  2086
      ** having to make additional calls to fetch the content portion of
dvander@1203
  2087
      ** the record.
dvander@1203
  2088
      */
dvander@1203
  2089
      if( avail>=payloadSize ){
dvander@1203
  2090
        zRec = zData;
dvander@1203
  2091
        pC->aRow = (u8*)zData;
dvander@1203
  2092
      }else{
dvander@1203
  2093
        pC->aRow = 0;
dvander@1203
  2094
      }
dvander@1203
  2095
    }
dvander@1203
  2096
    /* The following assert is true in all cases accept when
dvander@1203
  2097
    ** the database file has been corrupted externally.
dvander@1203
  2098
    **    assert( zRec!=0 || avail>=payloadSize || avail>=9 ); */
dvander@1203
  2099
    szHdrSz = GetVarint((u8*)zData, offset);
dvander@1203
  2100
dvander@1203
  2101
    /* The KeyFetch() or DataFetch() above are fast and will get the entire
dvander@1203
  2102
    ** record header in most cases.  But they will fail to get the complete
dvander@1203
  2103
    ** record header if the record header does not fit on a single page
dvander@1203
  2104
    ** in the B-Tree.  When that happens, use sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree() to
dvander@1203
  2105
    ** acquire the complete header text.
dvander@1203
  2106
    */
dvander@1203
  2107
    if( !zRec && avail<offset ){
dvander@1203
  2108
      rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, 0, offset, pC->isIndex, &sMem);
dvander@1203
  2109
      if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  2110
        goto op_column_out;
dvander@1203
  2111
      }
dvander@1203
  2112
      zData = sMem.z;
dvander@1203
  2113
    }
dvander@1203
  2114
    zEndHdr = (u8 *)&zData[offset];
dvander@1203
  2115
    zIdx = (u8 *)&zData[szHdrSz];
dvander@1203
  2116
dvander@1203
  2117
    /* Scan the header and use it to fill in the aType[] and aOffset[]
dvander@1203
  2118
    ** arrays.  aType[i] will contain the type integer for the i-th
dvander@1203
  2119
    ** column and aOffset[i] will contain the offset from the beginning
dvander@1203
  2120
    ** of the record to the start of the data for the i-th column
dvander@1203
  2121
    */
dvander@1203
  2122
    for(i=0; i<nField; i++){
dvander@1203
  2123
      if( zIdx<zEndHdr ){
dvander@1203
  2124
        aOffset[i] = offset;
dvander@1203
  2125
        zIdx += GetVarint(zIdx, aType[i]);
dvander@1203
  2126
        offset += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(aType[i]);
dvander@1203
  2127
      }else{
dvander@1203
  2128
        /* If i is less that nField, then there are less fields in this
dvander@1203
  2129
        ** record than SetNumColumns indicated there are columns in the
dvander@1203
  2130
        ** table. Set the offset for any extra columns not present in
dvander@1203
  2131
        ** the record to 0. This tells code below to push a NULL onto the
dvander@1203
  2132
        ** stack instead of deserializing a value from the record.
dvander@1203
  2133
        */
dvander@1203
  2134
        aOffset[i] = 0;
dvander@1203
  2135
      }
dvander@1203
  2136
    }
dvander@1203
  2137
    Release(&sMem);
dvander@1203
  2138
    sMem.flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  2139
dvander@1203
  2140
    /* If we have read more header data than was contained in the header,
dvander@1203
  2141
    ** or if the end of the last field appears to be past the end of the
dvander@1203
  2142
    ** record, then we must be dealing with a corrupt database.
dvander@1203
  2143
    */
dvander@1203
  2144
    if( zIdx>zEndHdr || offset>payloadSize ){
dvander@1203
  2145
      rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
dvander@1203
  2146
      goto op_column_out;
dvander@1203
  2147
    }
dvander@1203
  2148
  }
dvander@1203
  2149
dvander@1203
  2150
  /* Get the column information. If aOffset[p2] is non-zero, then 
dvander@1203
  2151
  ** deserialize the value from the record. If aOffset[p2] is zero,
dvander@1203
  2152
  ** then there are not enough fields in the record to satisfy the
dvander@1203
  2153
  ** request.  In this case, set the value NULL or to P3 if P3 is
dvander@1203
  2154
  ** a pointer to a Mem object.
dvander@1203
  2155
  */
dvander@1203
  2156
  if( aOffset[p2] ){
dvander@1203
  2157
    assert( rc==SQLITE_OK );
dvander@1203
  2158
    if( zRec ){
dvander@1203
  2159
      zData = &zRec[aOffset[p2]];
dvander@1203
  2160
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2161
      len = sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(aType[p2]);
dvander@1203
  2162
      rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree(pCrsr, aOffset[p2], len, pC->isIndex,&sMem);
dvander@1203
  2163
      if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  2164
        goto op_column_out;
dvander@1203
  2165
      }
dvander@1203
  2166
      zData = sMem.z;
dvander@1203
  2167
    }
dvander@1203
  2168
    sqlite3VdbeSerialGet((u8*)zData, aType[p2], pTos);
dvander@1203
  2169
    pTos->enc = encoding;
dvander@1203
  2170
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2171
    if( pOp->p3type==P3_MEM ){
dvander@1203
  2172
      sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pTos, (Mem *)(pOp->p3), MEM_Static);
dvander@1203
  2173
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2174
      pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  2175
    }
dvander@1203
  2176
  }
dvander@1203
  2177
dvander@1203
  2178
  /* If we dynamically allocated space to hold the data (in the
dvander@1203
  2179
  ** sqlite3VdbeMemFromBtree() call above) then transfer control of that
dvander@1203
  2180
  ** dynamically allocated space over to the pTos structure.
dvander@1203
  2181
  ** This prevents a memory copy.
dvander@1203
  2182
  */
dvander@1203
  2183
  if( (sMem.flags & MEM_Dyn)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  2184
    assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Ephem );
dvander@1203
  2185
    assert( pTos->flags & (MEM_Str|MEM_Blob) );
dvander@1203
  2186
    assert( pTos->z==sMem.z );
dvander@1203
  2187
    assert( sMem.flags & MEM_Term );
dvander@1203
  2188
    pTos->flags &= ~MEM_Ephem;
dvander@1203
  2189
    pTos->flags |= MEM_Dyn|MEM_Term;
dvander@1203
  2190
  }
dvander@1203
  2191
dvander@1203
  2192
  /* pTos->z might be pointing to sMem.zShort[].  Fix that so that we
dvander@1203
  2193
  ** can abandon sMem */
dvander@1203
  2194
  rc = sqlite3VdbeMemMakeWriteable(pTos);
dvander@1203
  2195
dvander@1203
  2196
op_column_out:
dvander@1203
  2197
  break;
dvander@1203
  2198
}
dvander@1203
  2199
dvander@1203
  2200
/* Opcode: MakeRecord P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  2201
**
dvander@1203
  2202
** Convert the top abs(P1) entries of the stack into a single entry
dvander@1203
  2203
** suitable for use as a data record in a database table or as a key
dvander@1203
  2204
** in an index.  The details of the format are irrelavant as long as
dvander@1203
  2205
** the OP_Column opcode can decode the record later and as long as the
dvander@1203
  2206
** sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare function will correctly compare two encoded
dvander@1203
  2207
** records.  Refer to source code comments for the details of the record
dvander@1203
  2208
** format.
dvander@1203
  2209
**
dvander@1203
  2210
** The original stack entries are popped from the stack if P1>0 but
dvander@1203
  2211
** remain on the stack if P1<0.
dvander@1203
  2212
**
dvander@1203
  2213
** If P2 is not zero and one or more of the entries are NULL, then jump
dvander@1203
  2214
** to the address given by P2.  This feature can be used to skip a
dvander@1203
  2215
** uniqueness test on indices.
dvander@1203
  2216
**
dvander@1203
  2217
** P3 may be a string that is P1 characters long.  The nth character of the
dvander@1203
  2218
** string indicates the column affinity that should be used for the nth
dvander@1203
  2219
** field of the index key (i.e. the first character of P3 corresponds to the
dvander@1203
  2220
** lowest element on the stack).
dvander@1203
  2221
**
dvander@1203
  2222
** The mapping from character to affinity is given by the SQLITE_AFF_
dvander@1203
  2223
** macros defined in sqliteInt.h.
dvander@1203
  2224
**
dvander@1203
  2225
** If P3 is NULL then all index fields have the affinity NONE.
dvander@1203
  2226
**
dvander@1203
  2227
** See also OP_MakeIdxRec
dvander@1203
  2228
*/
dvander@1203
  2229
/* Opcode: MakeIdxRec P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  2230
**
dvander@1203
  2231
** This opcode works just OP_MakeRecord except that it reads an extra
dvander@1203
  2232
** integer from the stack (thus reading a total of abs(P1+1) entries)
dvander@1203
  2233
** and appends that extra integer to the end of the record as a varint.
dvander@1203
  2234
** This results in an index key.
dvander@1203
  2235
*/
dvander@1203
  2236
case OP_MakeIdxRec:
dvander@1203
  2237
case OP_MakeRecord: {
dvander@1203
  2238
  /* Assuming the record contains N fields, the record format looks
dvander@1203
  2239
  ** like this:
dvander@1203
  2240
  **
dvander@1203
  2241
  ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
dvander@1203
  2242
  ** | hdr-size | type 0 | type 1 | ... | type N-1 | data0 | ... | data N-1 | 
dvander@1203
  2243
  ** ------------------------------------------------------------------------
dvander@1203
  2244
  **
dvander@1203
  2245
  ** Data(0) is taken from the lowest element of the stack and data(N-1) is
dvander@1203
  2246
  ** the top of the stack.
dvander@1203
  2247
  **
dvander@1203
  2248
  ** Each type field is a varint representing the serial type of the 
dvander@1203
  2249
  ** corresponding data element (see sqlite3VdbeSerialType()). The
dvander@1203
  2250
  ** hdr-size field is also a varint which is the offset from the beginning
dvander@1203
  2251
  ** of the record to data0.
dvander@1203
  2252
  */
dvander@1203
  2253
  u8 *zNewRecord;        /* A buffer to hold the data for the new record */
dvander@1203
  2254
  Mem *pRec;             /* The new record */
dvander@1203
  2255
  Mem *pRowid = 0;       /* Rowid appended to the new record */
dvander@1203
  2256
  u64 nData = 0;         /* Number of bytes of data space */
dvander@1203
  2257
  int nHdr = 0;          /* Number of bytes of header space */
dvander@1203
  2258
  u64 nByte = 0;         /* Data space required for this record */
dvander@1203
  2259
  int nZero = 0;         /* Number of zero bytes at the end of the record */
dvander@1203
  2260
  int nVarint;           /* Number of bytes in a varint */
dvander@1203
  2261
  u32 serial_type;       /* Type field */
dvander@1203
  2262
  int containsNull = 0;  /* True if any of the data fields are NULL */
dvander@1203
  2263
  Mem *pData0;           /* Bottom of the stack */
dvander@1203
  2264
  int leaveOnStack;      /* If true, leave the entries on the stack */
dvander@1203
  2265
  int nField;            /* Number of fields in the record */
dvander@1203
  2266
  int jumpIfNull;        /* Jump here if non-zero and any entries are NULL. */
dvander@1203
  2267
  int addRowid;          /* True to append a rowid column at the end */
dvander@1203
  2268
  char *zAffinity;       /* The affinity string for the record */
dvander@1203
  2269
  int file_format;       /* File format to use for encoding */
dvander@1203
  2270
  int i;                 /* Space used in zNewRecord[] */
dvander@1203
  2271
  char zTemp[NBFS];      /* Space to hold small records */
dvander@1203
  2272
dvander@1203
  2273
  leaveOnStack = ((pOp->p1<0)?1:0);
dvander@1203
  2274
  nField = pOp->p1 * (leaveOnStack?-1:1);
dvander@1203
  2275
  jumpIfNull = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  2276
  addRowid = pOp->opcode==OP_MakeIdxRec;
dvander@1203
  2277
  zAffinity = pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  2278
dvander@1203
  2279
  pData0 = &pTos[1-nField];
dvander@1203
  2280
  assert( pData0>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  2281
  containsNull = 0;
dvander@1203
  2282
  file_format = p->minWriteFileFormat;
dvander@1203
  2283
dvander@1203
  2284
  /* Loop through the elements that will make up the record to figure
dvander@1203
  2285
  ** out how much space is required for the new record.
dvander@1203
  2286
  */
dvander@1203
  2287
  for(pRec=pData0; pRec<=pTos; pRec++){
dvander@1203
  2288
    int len;
dvander@1203
  2289
    if( zAffinity ){
dvander@1203
  2290
      applyAffinity(pRec, zAffinity[pRec-pData0], encoding);
dvander@1203
  2291
    }
dvander@1203
  2292
    if( pRec->flags&MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  2293
      containsNull = 1;
dvander@1203
  2294
    }
dvander@1203
  2295
    if( pRec->flags&MEM_Zero && pRec->n>0 ){
dvander@1203
  2296
      ExpandBlob(pRec);
dvander@1203
  2297
    }
dvander@1203
  2298
    serial_type = sqlite3VdbeSerialType(pRec, file_format);
dvander@1203
  2299
    len = sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type);
dvander@1203
  2300
    nData += len;
dvander@1203
  2301
    nHdr += sqlite3VarintLen(serial_type);
dvander@1203
  2302
    if( pRec->flags & MEM_Zero ){
dvander@1203
  2303
      /* Only pure zero-filled BLOBs can be input to this Opcode.
dvander@1203
  2304
      ** We do not allow blobs with a prefix and a zero-filled tail. */
dvander@1203
  2305
      nZero += pRec->u.i;
dvander@1203
  2306
    }else if( len ){
dvander@1203
  2307
      nZero = 0;
dvander@1203
  2308
    }
dvander@1203
  2309
  }
dvander@1203
  2310
dvander@1203
  2311
  /* If we have to append a varint rowid to this record, set pRowid
dvander@1203
  2312
  ** to the value of the rowid and increase nByte by the amount of space
dvander@1203
  2313
  ** required to store it.
dvander@1203
  2314
  */
dvander@1203
  2315
  if( addRowid ){
dvander@1203
  2316
    pRowid = &pTos[0-nField];
dvander@1203
  2317
    assert( pRowid>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  2318
    sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pRowid);
dvander@1203
  2319
    serial_type = sqlite3VdbeSerialType(pRowid, 0);
dvander@1203
  2320
    nData += sqlite3VdbeSerialTypeLen(serial_type);
dvander@1203
  2321
    nHdr += sqlite3VarintLen(serial_type);
dvander@1203
  2322
    nZero = 0;
dvander@1203
  2323
  }
dvander@1203
  2324
dvander@1203
  2325
  /* Add the initial header varint and total the size */
dvander@1203
  2326
  nHdr += nVarint = sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr);
dvander@1203
  2327
  if( nVarint<sqlite3VarintLen(nHdr) ){
dvander@1203
  2328
    nHdr++;
dvander@1203
  2329
  }
dvander@1203
  2330
  nByte = nHdr+nData-nZero;
dvander@1203
  2331
  if( nByte>SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ){
dvander@1203
  2332
    goto too_big;
dvander@1203
  2333
  }
dvander@1203
  2334
dvander@1203
  2335
  /* Allocate space for the new record. */
dvander@1203
  2336
  if( nByte>sizeof(zTemp) ){
dvander@1203
  2337
    zNewRecord = sqliteMallocRaw(nByte);
dvander@1203
  2338
    if( !zNewRecord ){
dvander@1203
  2339
      goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  2340
    }
dvander@1203
  2341
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2342
    zNewRecord = (u8*)zTemp;
dvander@1203
  2343
  }
dvander@1203
  2344
dvander@1203
  2345
  /* Write the record */
dvander@1203
  2346
  i = sqlite3PutVarint(zNewRecord, nHdr);
dvander@1203
  2347
  for(pRec=pData0; pRec<=pTos; pRec++){
dvander@1203
  2348
    serial_type = sqlite3VdbeSerialType(pRec, file_format);
dvander@1203
  2349
    i += sqlite3PutVarint(&zNewRecord[i], serial_type);      /* serial type */
dvander@1203
  2350
  }
dvander@1203
  2351
  if( addRowid ){
dvander@1203
  2352
    i += sqlite3PutVarint(&zNewRecord[i], sqlite3VdbeSerialType(pRowid, 0));
dvander@1203
  2353
  }
dvander@1203
  2354
  for(pRec=pData0; pRec<=pTos; pRec++){  /* serial data */
dvander@1203
  2355
    i += sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(&zNewRecord[i], nByte-i, pRec, file_format);
dvander@1203
  2356
  }
dvander@1203
  2357
  if( addRowid ){
dvander@1203
  2358
    i += sqlite3VdbeSerialPut(&zNewRecord[i], nByte-i, pRowid, 0);
dvander@1203
  2359
  }
dvander@1203
  2360
  assert( i==nByte );
dvander@1203
  2361
dvander@1203
  2362
  /* Pop entries off the stack if required. Push the new record on. */
dvander@1203
  2363
  if( !leaveOnStack ){
dvander@1203
  2364
    popStack(&pTos, nField+addRowid);
dvander@1203
  2365
  }
dvander@1203
  2366
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  2367
  pTos->n = nByte;
dvander@1203
  2368
  if( nByte<=sizeof(zTemp) ){
dvander@1203
  2369
    assert( zNewRecord==(unsigned char *)zTemp );
dvander@1203
  2370
    pTos->z = pTos->zShort;
dvander@1203
  2371
    memcpy(pTos->zShort, zTemp, nByte);
dvander@1203
  2372
    pTos->flags = MEM_Blob | MEM_Short;
dvander@1203
  2373
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2374
    assert( zNewRecord!=(unsigned char *)zTemp );
dvander@1203
  2375
    pTos->z = (char*)zNewRecord;
dvander@1203
  2376
    pTos->flags = MEM_Blob | MEM_Dyn;
dvander@1203
  2377
    pTos->xDel = 0;
dvander@1203
  2378
  }
dvander@1203
  2379
  if( nZero ){
dvander@1203
  2380
    pTos->u.i = nZero;
dvander@1203
  2381
    pTos->flags |= MEM_Zero;
dvander@1203
  2382
  }
dvander@1203
  2383
  pTos->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;  /* In case the blob is ever converted to text */
dvander@1203
  2384
dvander@1203
  2385
  /* If a NULL was encountered and jumpIfNull is non-zero, take the jump. */
dvander@1203
  2386
  if( jumpIfNull && containsNull ){
dvander@1203
  2387
    pc = jumpIfNull - 1;
dvander@1203
  2388
  }
dvander@1203
  2389
  break;
dvander@1203
  2390
}
dvander@1203
  2391
dvander@1203
  2392
/* Opcode: Statement P1 * *
dvander@1203
  2393
**
dvander@1203
  2394
** Begin an individual statement transaction which is part of a larger
dvander@1203
  2395
** BEGIN..COMMIT transaction.  This is needed so that the statement
dvander@1203
  2396
** can be rolled back after an error without having to roll back the
dvander@1203
  2397
** entire transaction.  The statement transaction will automatically
dvander@1203
  2398
** commit when the VDBE halts.
dvander@1203
  2399
**
dvander@1203
  2400
** The statement is begun on the database file with index P1.  The main
dvander@1203
  2401
** database file has an index of 0 and the file used for temporary tables
dvander@1203
  2402
** has an index of 1.
dvander@1203
  2403
*/
dvander@1203
  2404
case OP_Statement: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2405
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2406
  Btree *pBt;
dvander@1203
  2407
  if( i>=0 && i<db->nDb && (pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt)!=0 && !(db->autoCommit) ){
dvander@1203
  2408
    assert( sqlite3BtreeIsInTrans(pBt) );
dvander@1203
  2409
    if( !sqlite3BtreeIsInStmt(pBt) ){
dvander@1203
  2410
      rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginStmt(pBt);
dvander@1203
  2411
      p->openedStatement = 1;
dvander@1203
  2412
    }
dvander@1203
  2413
  }
dvander@1203
  2414
  break;
dvander@1203
  2415
}
dvander@1203
  2416
dvander@1203
  2417
/* Opcode: AutoCommit P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2418
**
dvander@1203
  2419
** Set the database auto-commit flag to P1 (1 or 0). If P2 is true, roll
dvander@1203
  2420
** back any currently active btree transactions. If there are any active
dvander@1203
  2421
** VMs (apart from this one), then the COMMIT or ROLLBACK statement fails.
dvander@1203
  2422
**
dvander@1203
  2423
** This instruction causes the VM to halt.
dvander@1203
  2424
*/
dvander@1203
  2425
case OP_AutoCommit: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2426
  u8 i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2427
  u8 rollback = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  2428
dvander@1203
  2429
  assert( i==1 || i==0 );
dvander@1203
  2430
  assert( i==1 || rollback==0 );
dvander@1203
  2431
dvander@1203
  2432
  assert( db->activeVdbeCnt>0 );  /* At least this one VM is active */
dvander@1203
  2433
dvander@1203
  2434
  if( db->activeVdbeCnt>1 && i && !db->autoCommit ){
dvander@1203
  2435
    /* If this instruction implements a COMMIT or ROLLBACK, other VMs are
dvander@1203
  2436
    ** still running, and a transaction is active, return an error indicating
dvander@1203
  2437
    ** that the other VMs must complete first. 
dvander@1203
  2438
    */
dvander@1203
  2439
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "cannot ", rollback?"rollback":"commit", 
dvander@1203
  2440
        " transaction - SQL statements in progress", (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  2441
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  2442
  }else if( i!=db->autoCommit ){
dvander@1203
  2443
    if( pOp->p2 ){
dvander@1203
  2444
      assert( i==1 );
dvander@1203
  2445
      sqlite3RollbackAll(db);
dvander@1203
  2446
      db->autoCommit = 1;
dvander@1203
  2447
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2448
      db->autoCommit = i;
dvander@1203
  2449
      if( sqlite3VdbeHalt(p)==SQLITE_BUSY ){
dvander@1203
  2450
        p->pTos = pTos;
dvander@1203
  2451
        p->pc = pc;
dvander@1203
  2452
        db->autoCommit = 1-i;
dvander@1203
  2453
        p->rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
dvander@1203
  2454
        return SQLITE_BUSY;
dvander@1203
  2455
      }
dvander@1203
  2456
    }
dvander@1203
  2457
    if( p->rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  2458
      return SQLITE_DONE;
dvander@1203
  2459
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2460
      return SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  2461
    }
dvander@1203
  2462
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2463
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg,
dvander@1203
  2464
        (!i)?"cannot start a transaction within a transaction":(
dvander@1203
  2465
        (rollback)?"cannot rollback - no transaction is active":
dvander@1203
  2466
                   "cannot commit - no transaction is active"), (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  2467
         
dvander@1203
  2468
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  2469
  }
dvander@1203
  2470
  break;
dvander@1203
  2471
}
dvander@1203
  2472
dvander@1203
  2473
/* Opcode: Transaction P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2474
**
dvander@1203
  2475
** Begin a transaction.  The transaction ends when a Commit or Rollback
dvander@1203
  2476
** opcode is encountered.  Depending on the ON CONFLICT setting, the
dvander@1203
  2477
** transaction might also be rolled back if an error is encountered.
dvander@1203
  2478
**
dvander@1203
  2479
** P1 is the index of the database file on which the transaction is
dvander@1203
  2480
** started.  Index 0 is the main database file and index 1 is the
dvander@1203
  2481
** file used for temporary tables.
dvander@1203
  2482
**
dvander@1203
  2483
** If P2 is non-zero, then a write-transaction is started.  A RESERVED lock is
dvander@1203
  2484
** obtained on the database file when a write-transaction is started.  No
dvander@1203
  2485
** other process can start another write transaction while this transaction is
dvander@1203
  2486
** underway.  Starting a write transaction also creates a rollback journal. A
dvander@1203
  2487
** write transaction must be started before any changes can be made to the
dvander@1203
  2488
** database.  If P2 is 2 or greater then an EXCLUSIVE lock is also obtained
dvander@1203
  2489
** on the file.
dvander@1203
  2490
**
dvander@1203
  2491
** If P2 is zero, then a read-lock is obtained on the database file.
dvander@1203
  2492
*/
dvander@1203
  2493
case OP_Transaction: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2494
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2495
  Btree *pBt;
dvander@1203
  2496
dvander@1203
  2497
  assert( i>=0 && i<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  2498
  pBt = db->aDb[i].pBt;
dvander@1203
  2499
dvander@1203
  2500
  if( pBt ){
dvander@1203
  2501
    rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pBt, pOp->p2);
dvander@1203
  2502
    if( rc==SQLITE_BUSY ){
dvander@1203
  2503
      p->pc = pc;
dvander@1203
  2504
      p->rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
dvander@1203
  2505
      p->pTos = pTos;
dvander@1203
  2506
      return SQLITE_BUSY;
dvander@1203
  2507
    }
dvander@1203
  2508
    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK && rc!=SQLITE_READONLY /* && rc!=SQLITE_BUSY */ ){
dvander@1203
  2509
      goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2510
    }
dvander@1203
  2511
  }
dvander@1203
  2512
  break;
dvander@1203
  2513
}
dvander@1203
  2514
dvander@1203
  2515
/* Opcode: ReadCookie P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2516
**
dvander@1203
  2517
** Read cookie number P2 from database P1 and push it onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  2518
** P2==0 is the schema version.  P2==1 is the database format.
dvander@1203
  2519
** P2==2 is the recommended pager cache size, and so forth.  P1==0 is
dvander@1203
  2520
** the main database file and P1==1 is the database file used to store
dvander@1203
  2521
** temporary tables.
dvander@1203
  2522
**
dvander@1203
  2523
** If P1 is negative, then this is a request to read the size of a
dvander@1203
  2524
** databases free-list. P2 must be set to 1 in this case. The actual
dvander@1203
  2525
** database accessed is ((P1+1)*-1). For example, a P1 parameter of -1
dvander@1203
  2526
** corresponds to database 0 ("main"), a P1 of -2 is database 1 ("temp").
dvander@1203
  2527
**
dvander@1203
  2528
** There must be a read-lock on the database (either a transaction
dvander@1203
  2529
** must be started or there must be an open cursor) before
dvander@1203
  2530
** executing this instruction.
dvander@1203
  2531
*/
dvander@1203
  2532
case OP_ReadCookie: {
dvander@1203
  2533
  int iMeta;
dvander@1203
  2534
  int iDb = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2535
  int iCookie = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  2536
dvander@1203
  2537
  assert( pOp->p2<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META );
dvander@1203
  2538
  if( iDb<0 ){
dvander@1203
  2539
    iDb = (-1*(iDb+1));
dvander@1203
  2540
    iCookie *= -1;
dvander@1203
  2541
  }
dvander@1203
  2542
  assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  2543
  assert( db->aDb[iDb].pBt!=0 );
dvander@1203
  2544
  /* The indexing of meta values at the schema layer is off by one from
dvander@1203
  2545
  ** the indexing in the btree layer.  The btree considers meta[0] to
dvander@1203
  2546
  ** be the number of free pages in the database (a read-only value)
dvander@1203
  2547
  ** and meta[1] to be the schema cookie.  The schema layer considers
dvander@1203
  2548
  ** meta[1] to be the schema cookie.  So we have to shift the index
dvander@1203
  2549
  ** by one in the following statement.
dvander@1203
  2550
  */
dvander@1203
  2551
  rc = sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(db->aDb[iDb].pBt, 1 + iCookie, (u32 *)&iMeta);
dvander@1203
  2552
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  2553
  pTos->u.i = iMeta;
dvander@1203
  2554
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  2555
  break;
dvander@1203
  2556
}
dvander@1203
  2557
dvander@1203
  2558
/* Opcode: SetCookie P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2559
**
dvander@1203
  2560
** Write the top of the stack into cookie number P2 of database P1.
dvander@1203
  2561
** P2==0 is the schema version.  P2==1 is the database format.
dvander@1203
  2562
** P2==2 is the recommended pager cache size, and so forth.  P1==0 is
dvander@1203
  2563
** the main database file and P1==1 is the database file used to store
dvander@1203
  2564
** temporary tables.
dvander@1203
  2565
**
dvander@1203
  2566
** A transaction must be started before executing this opcode.
dvander@1203
  2567
*/
dvander@1203
  2568
case OP_SetCookie: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2569
  Db *pDb;
dvander@1203
  2570
  assert( pOp->p2<SQLITE_N_BTREE_META );
dvander@1203
  2571
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  2572
  pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  2573
  assert( pDb->pBt!=0 );
dvander@1203
  2574
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  2575
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  2576
  /* See note about index shifting on OP_ReadCookie */
dvander@1203
  2577
  rc = sqlite3BtreeUpdateMeta(pDb->pBt, 1+pOp->p2, (int)pTos->u.i);
dvander@1203
  2578
  if( pOp->p2==0 ){
dvander@1203
  2579
    /* When the schema cookie changes, record the new cookie internally */
dvander@1203
  2580
    pDb->pSchema->schema_cookie = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  2581
    db->flags |= SQLITE_InternChanges;
dvander@1203
  2582
  }else if( pOp->p2==1 ){
dvander@1203
  2583
    /* Record changes in the file format */
dvander@1203
  2584
    pDb->pSchema->file_format = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  2585
  }
dvander@1203
  2586
  assert( (pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 );
dvander@1203
  2587
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  2588
  if( pOp->p1==1 ){
dvander@1203
  2589
    /* Invalidate all prepared statements whenever the TEMP database
dvander@1203
  2590
    ** schema is changed.  Ticket #1644 */
dvander@1203
  2591
    sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db);
dvander@1203
  2592
  }
dvander@1203
  2593
  break;
dvander@1203
  2594
}
dvander@1203
  2595
dvander@1203
  2596
/* Opcode: VerifyCookie P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2597
**
dvander@1203
  2598
** Check the value of global database parameter number 0 (the
dvander@1203
  2599
** schema version) and make sure it is equal to P2.  
dvander@1203
  2600
** P1 is the database number which is 0 for the main database file
dvander@1203
  2601
** and 1 for the file holding temporary tables and some higher number
dvander@1203
  2602
** for auxiliary databases.
dvander@1203
  2603
**
dvander@1203
  2604
** The cookie changes its value whenever the database schema changes.
dvander@1203
  2605
** This operation is used to detect when that the cookie has changed
dvander@1203
  2606
** and that the current process needs to reread the schema.
dvander@1203
  2607
**
dvander@1203
  2608
** Either a transaction needs to have been started or an OP_Open needs
dvander@1203
  2609
** to be executed (to establish a read lock) before this opcode is
dvander@1203
  2610
** invoked.
dvander@1203
  2611
*/
dvander@1203
  2612
case OP_VerifyCookie: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2613
  int iMeta;
dvander@1203
  2614
  Btree *pBt;
dvander@1203
  2615
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  2616
  pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt;
dvander@1203
  2617
  if( pBt ){
dvander@1203
  2618
    rc = sqlite3BtreeGetMeta(pBt, 1, (u32 *)&iMeta);
dvander@1203
  2619
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2620
    rc = SQLITE_OK;
dvander@1203
  2621
    iMeta = 0;
dvander@1203
  2622
  }
dvander@1203
  2623
  if( rc==SQLITE_OK && iMeta!=pOp->p2 ){
dvander@1203
  2624
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "database schema has changed", (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  2625
    /* If the schema-cookie from the database file matches the cookie 
dvander@1203
  2626
    ** stored with the in-memory representation of the schema, do
dvander@1203
  2627
    ** not reload the schema from the database file.
dvander@1203
  2628
    **
dvander@1203
  2629
    ** If virtual-tables are in use, this is not just an optimisation.
dvander@1203
  2630
    ** Often, v-tables store their data in other SQLite tables, which
dvander@1203
  2631
    ** are queried from within xNext() and other v-table methods using
dvander@1203
  2632
    ** prepared queries. If such a query is out-of-date, we do not want to
dvander@1203
  2633
    ** discard the database schema, as the user code implementing the
dvander@1203
  2634
    ** v-table would have to be ready for the sqlite3_vtab structure itself
dvander@1203
  2635
    ** to be invalidated whenever sqlite3_step() is called from within 
dvander@1203
  2636
    ** a v-table method.
dvander@1203
  2637
    */
dvander@1203
  2638
    if( db->aDb[pOp->p1].pSchema->schema_cookie!=iMeta ){
dvander@1203
  2639
      sqlite3ResetInternalSchema(db, pOp->p1);
dvander@1203
  2640
    }
dvander@1203
  2641
dvander@1203
  2642
    sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db);
dvander@1203
  2643
    rc = SQLITE_SCHEMA;
dvander@1203
  2644
  }
dvander@1203
  2645
  break;
dvander@1203
  2646
}
dvander@1203
  2647
dvander@1203
  2648
/* Opcode: OpenRead P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  2649
**
dvander@1203
  2650
** Open a read-only cursor for the database table whose root page is
dvander@1203
  2651
** P2 in a database file.  The database file is determined by an 
dvander@1203
  2652
** integer from the top of the stack.  0 means the main database and
dvander@1203
  2653
** 1 means the database used for temporary tables.  Give the new 
dvander@1203
  2654
** cursor an identifier of P1.  The P1 values need not be contiguous
dvander@1203
  2655
** but all P1 values should be small integers.  It is an error for
dvander@1203
  2656
** P1 to be negative.
dvander@1203
  2657
**
dvander@1203
  2658
** If P2==0 then take the root page number from the next of the stack.
dvander@1203
  2659
**
dvander@1203
  2660
** There will be a read lock on the database whenever there is an
dvander@1203
  2661
** open cursor.  If the database was unlocked prior to this instruction
dvander@1203
  2662
** then a read lock is acquired as part of this instruction.  A read
dvander@1203
  2663
** lock allows other processes to read the database but prohibits
dvander@1203
  2664
** any other process from modifying the database.  The read lock is
dvander@1203
  2665
** released when all cursors are closed.  If this instruction attempts
dvander@1203
  2666
** to get a read lock but fails, the script terminates with an
dvander@1203
  2667
** SQLITE_BUSY error code.
dvander@1203
  2668
**
dvander@1203
  2669
** The P3 value is a pointer to a KeyInfo structure that defines the
dvander@1203
  2670
** content and collating sequence of indices.  P3 is NULL for cursors
dvander@1203
  2671
** that are not pointing to indices.
dvander@1203
  2672
**
dvander@1203
  2673
** See also OpenWrite.
dvander@1203
  2674
*/
dvander@1203
  2675
/* Opcode: OpenWrite P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  2676
**
dvander@1203
  2677
** Open a read/write cursor named P1 on the table or index whose root
dvander@1203
  2678
** page is P2.  If P2==0 then take the root page number from the stack.
dvander@1203
  2679
**
dvander@1203
  2680
** The P3 value is a pointer to a KeyInfo structure that defines the
dvander@1203
  2681
** content and collating sequence of indices.  P3 is NULL for cursors
dvander@1203
  2682
** that are not pointing to indices.
dvander@1203
  2683
**
dvander@1203
  2684
** This instruction works just like OpenRead except that it opens the cursor
dvander@1203
  2685
** in read/write mode.  For a given table, there can be one or more read-only
dvander@1203
  2686
** cursors or a single read/write cursor but not both.
dvander@1203
  2687
**
dvander@1203
  2688
** See also OpenRead.
dvander@1203
  2689
*/
dvander@1203
  2690
case OP_OpenRead:          /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2691
case OP_OpenWrite: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2692
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2693
  int p2 = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  2694
  int wrFlag;
dvander@1203
  2695
  Btree *pX;
dvander@1203
  2696
  int iDb;
dvander@1203
  2697
  Cursor *pCur;
dvander@1203
  2698
  Db *pDb;
dvander@1203
  2699
  
dvander@1203
  2700
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  2701
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  2702
  iDb = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  2703
  assert( (pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 );
dvander@1203
  2704
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  2705
  assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  2706
  pDb = &db->aDb[iDb];
dvander@1203
  2707
  pX = pDb->pBt;
dvander@1203
  2708
  assert( pX!=0 );
dvander@1203
  2709
  if( pOp->opcode==OP_OpenWrite ){
dvander@1203
  2710
    wrFlag = 1;
dvander@1203
  2711
    if( pDb->pSchema->file_format < p->minWriteFileFormat ){
dvander@1203
  2712
      p->minWriteFileFormat = pDb->pSchema->file_format;
dvander@1203
  2713
    }
dvander@1203
  2714
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2715
    wrFlag = 0;
dvander@1203
  2716
  }
dvander@1203
  2717
  if( p2<=0 ){
dvander@1203
  2718
    assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  2719
    sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  2720
    p2 = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  2721
    assert( (pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 );
dvander@1203
  2722
    pTos--;
dvander@1203
  2723
    assert( p2>=2 );
dvander@1203
  2724
  }
dvander@1203
  2725
  assert( i>=0 );
dvander@1203
  2726
  pCur = allocateCursor(p, i, iDb);
dvander@1203
  2727
  if( pCur==0 ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  2728
  pCur->nullRow = 1;
dvander@1203
  2729
  if( pX==0 ) break;
dvander@1203
  2730
  /* We always provide a key comparison function.  If the table being
dvander@1203
  2731
  ** opened is of type INTKEY, the comparision function will be ignored. */
dvander@1203
  2732
  rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pX, p2, wrFlag,
dvander@1203
  2733
           sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare, pOp->p3,
dvander@1203
  2734
           &pCur->pCursor);
dvander@1203
  2735
  if( pOp->p3type==P3_KEYINFO ){
dvander@1203
  2736
    pCur->pKeyInfo = (KeyInfo*)pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  2737
    pCur->pIncrKey = &pCur->pKeyInfo->incrKey;
dvander@1203
  2738
    pCur->pKeyInfo->enc = ENC(p->db);
dvander@1203
  2739
  }else{
dvander@1203
  2740
    pCur->pKeyInfo = 0;
dvander@1203
  2741
    pCur->pIncrKey = &pCur->bogusIncrKey;
dvander@1203
  2742
  }
dvander@1203
  2743
  switch( rc ){
dvander@1203
  2744
    case SQLITE_BUSY: {
dvander@1203
  2745
      p->pc = pc;
dvander@1203
  2746
      p->rc = SQLITE_BUSY;
dvander@1203
  2747
      p->pTos = &pTos[1 + (pOp->p2<=0)]; /* Operands must remain on stack */
dvander@1203
  2748
      return SQLITE_BUSY;
dvander@1203
  2749
    }
dvander@1203
  2750
    case SQLITE_OK: {
dvander@1203
  2751
      int flags = sqlite3BtreeFlags(pCur->pCursor);
dvander@1203
  2752
      /* Sanity checking.  Only the lower four bits of the flags byte should
dvander@1203
  2753
      ** be used.  Bit 3 (mask 0x08) is unpreditable.  The lower 3 bits
dvander@1203
  2754
      ** (mask 0x07) should be either 5 (intkey+leafdata for tables) or
dvander@1203
  2755
      ** 2 (zerodata for indices).  If these conditions are not met it can
dvander@1203
  2756
      ** only mean that we are dealing with a corrupt database file
dvander@1203
  2757
      */
dvander@1203
  2758
      if( (flags & 0xf0)!=0 || ((flags & 0x07)!=5 && (flags & 0x07)!=2) ){
dvander@1203
  2759
        rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
dvander@1203
  2760
        goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2761
      }
dvander@1203
  2762
      pCur->isTable = (flags & BTREE_INTKEY)!=0;
dvander@1203
  2763
      pCur->isIndex = (flags & BTREE_ZERODATA)!=0;
dvander@1203
  2764
      /* If P3==0 it means we are expected to open a table.  If P3!=0 then
dvander@1203
  2765
      ** we expect to be opening an index.  If this is not what happened,
dvander@1203
  2766
      ** then the database is corrupt
dvander@1203
  2767
      */
dvander@1203
  2768
      if( (pCur->isTable && pOp->p3type==P3_KEYINFO)
dvander@1203
  2769
       || (pCur->isIndex && pOp->p3type!=P3_KEYINFO) ){
dvander@1203
  2770
        rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
dvander@1203
  2771
        goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2772
      }
dvander@1203
  2773
      break;
dvander@1203
  2774
    }
dvander@1203
  2775
    case SQLITE_EMPTY: {
dvander@1203
  2776
      pCur->isTable = pOp->p3type!=P3_KEYINFO;
dvander@1203
  2777
      pCur->isIndex = !pCur->isTable;
dvander@1203
  2778
      rc = SQLITE_OK;
dvander@1203
  2779
      break;
dvander@1203
  2780
    }
dvander@1203
  2781
    default: {
dvander@1203
  2782
      goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2783
    }
dvander@1203
  2784
  }
dvander@1203
  2785
  break;
dvander@1203
  2786
}
dvander@1203
  2787
dvander@1203
  2788
/* Opcode: OpenEphemeral P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  2789
**
dvander@1203
  2790
** Open a new cursor P1 to a transient table.
dvander@1203
  2791
** The cursor is always opened read/write even if 
dvander@1203
  2792
** the main database is read-only.  The transient or virtual
dvander@1203
  2793
** table is deleted automatically when the cursor is closed.
dvander@1203
  2794
**
dvander@1203
  2795
** P2 is the number of columns in the virtual table.
dvander@1203
  2796
** The cursor points to a BTree table if P3==0 and to a BTree index
dvander@1203
  2797
** if P3 is not 0.  If P3 is not NULL, it points to a KeyInfo structure
dvander@1203
  2798
** that defines the format of keys in the index.
dvander@1203
  2799
**
dvander@1203
  2800
** This opcode was once called OpenTemp.  But that created
dvander@1203
  2801
** confusion because the term "temp table", might refer either
dvander@1203
  2802
** to a TEMP table at the SQL level, or to a table opened by
dvander@1203
  2803
** this opcode.  Then this opcode was call OpenVirtual.  But
dvander@1203
  2804
** that created confusion with the whole virtual-table idea.
dvander@1203
  2805
*/
dvander@1203
  2806
case OP_OpenEphemeral: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2807
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2808
  Cursor *pCx;
dvander@1203
  2809
  assert( i>=0 );
dvander@1203
  2810
  pCx = allocateCursor(p, i, -1);
dvander@1203
  2811
  if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  2812
  pCx->nullRow = 1;
dvander@1203
  2813
  rc = sqlite3BtreeFactory(db, 0, 1, SQLITE_DEFAULT_TEMP_CACHE_SIZE, &pCx->pBt);
dvander@1203
  2814
  if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  2815
    rc = sqlite3BtreeBeginTrans(pCx->pBt, 1);
dvander@1203
  2816
  }
dvander@1203
  2817
  if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  2818
    /* If a transient index is required, create it by calling
dvander@1203
  2819
    ** sqlite3BtreeCreateTable() with the BTREE_ZERODATA flag before
dvander@1203
  2820
    ** opening it. If a transient table is required, just use the
dvander@1203
  2821
    ** automatically created table with root-page 1 (an INTKEY table).
dvander@1203
  2822
    */
dvander@1203
  2823
    if( pOp->p3 ){
dvander@1203
  2824
      int pgno;
dvander@1203
  2825
      assert( pOp->p3type==P3_KEYINFO );
dvander@1203
  2826
      rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pCx->pBt, &pgno, BTREE_ZERODATA); 
dvander@1203
  2827
      if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  2828
        assert( pgno==MASTER_ROOT+1 );
dvander@1203
  2829
        rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->pBt, pgno, 1, sqlite3VdbeRecordCompare,
dvander@1203
  2830
            pOp->p3, &pCx->pCursor);
dvander@1203
  2831
        pCx->pKeyInfo = (KeyInfo*)pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  2832
        pCx->pKeyInfo->enc = ENC(p->db);
dvander@1203
  2833
        pCx->pIncrKey = &pCx->pKeyInfo->incrKey;
dvander@1203
  2834
      }
dvander@1203
  2835
      pCx->isTable = 0;
dvander@1203
  2836
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2837
      rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pCx->pBt, MASTER_ROOT, 1, 0, 0, &pCx->pCursor);
dvander@1203
  2838
      pCx->isTable = 1;
dvander@1203
  2839
      pCx->pIncrKey = &pCx->bogusIncrKey;
dvander@1203
  2840
    }
dvander@1203
  2841
  }
dvander@1203
  2842
  pCx->nField = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  2843
  pCx->isIndex = !pCx->isTable;
dvander@1203
  2844
  break;
dvander@1203
  2845
}
dvander@1203
  2846
dvander@1203
  2847
/* Opcode: OpenPseudo P1 * *
dvander@1203
  2848
**
dvander@1203
  2849
** Open a new cursor that points to a fake table that contains a single
dvander@1203
  2850
** row of data.  Any attempt to write a second row of data causes the
dvander@1203
  2851
** first row to be deleted.  All data is deleted when the cursor is
dvander@1203
  2852
** closed.
dvander@1203
  2853
**
dvander@1203
  2854
** A pseudo-table created by this opcode is useful for holding the
dvander@1203
  2855
** NEW or OLD tables in a trigger.  Also used to hold the a single
dvander@1203
  2856
** row output from the sorter so that the row can be decomposed into
dvander@1203
  2857
** individual columns using the OP_Column opcode.
dvander@1203
  2858
*/
dvander@1203
  2859
case OP_OpenPseudo: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2860
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2861
  Cursor *pCx;
dvander@1203
  2862
  assert( i>=0 );
dvander@1203
  2863
  pCx = allocateCursor(p, i, -1);
dvander@1203
  2864
  if( pCx==0 ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  2865
  pCx->nullRow = 1;
dvander@1203
  2866
  pCx->pseudoTable = 1;
dvander@1203
  2867
  pCx->pIncrKey = &pCx->bogusIncrKey;
dvander@1203
  2868
  pCx->isTable = 1;
dvander@1203
  2869
  pCx->isIndex = 0;
dvander@1203
  2870
  break;
dvander@1203
  2871
}
dvander@1203
  2872
dvander@1203
  2873
/* Opcode: Close P1 * *
dvander@1203
  2874
**
dvander@1203
  2875
** Close a cursor previously opened as P1.  If P1 is not
dvander@1203
  2876
** currently open, this instruction is a no-op.
dvander@1203
  2877
*/
dvander@1203
  2878
case OP_Close: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2879
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2880
  if( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor ){
dvander@1203
  2881
    sqlite3VdbeFreeCursor(p, p->apCsr[i]);
dvander@1203
  2882
    p->apCsr[i] = 0;
dvander@1203
  2883
  }
dvander@1203
  2884
  break;
dvander@1203
  2885
}
dvander@1203
  2886
dvander@1203
  2887
/* Opcode: MoveGe P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2888
**
dvander@1203
  2889
** Pop the top of the stack and use its value as a key.  Reposition
dvander@1203
  2890
** cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that is greater
dvander@1203
  2891
** than or equal to the key that was popped ffrom the stack.
dvander@1203
  2892
** If there are no records greater than or equal to the key and P2 
dvander@1203
  2893
** is not zero, then jump to P2.
dvander@1203
  2894
**
dvander@1203
  2895
** See also: Found, NotFound, Distinct, MoveLt, MoveGt, MoveLe
dvander@1203
  2896
*/
dvander@1203
  2897
/* Opcode: MoveGt P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2898
**
dvander@1203
  2899
** Pop the top of the stack and use its value as a key.  Reposition
dvander@1203
  2900
** cursor P1 so that it points to the smallest entry that is greater
dvander@1203
  2901
** than the key from the stack.
dvander@1203
  2902
** If there are no records greater than the key and P2 is not zero,
dvander@1203
  2903
** then jump to P2.
dvander@1203
  2904
**
dvander@1203
  2905
** See also: Found, NotFound, Distinct, MoveLt, MoveGe, MoveLe
dvander@1203
  2906
*/
dvander@1203
  2907
/* Opcode: MoveLt P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2908
**
dvander@1203
  2909
** Pop the top of the stack and use its value as a key.  Reposition
dvander@1203
  2910
** cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that is less
dvander@1203
  2911
** than the key from the stack.
dvander@1203
  2912
** If there are no records less than the key and P2 is not zero,
dvander@1203
  2913
** then jump to P2.
dvander@1203
  2914
**
dvander@1203
  2915
** See also: Found, NotFound, Distinct, MoveGt, MoveGe, MoveLe
dvander@1203
  2916
*/
dvander@1203
  2917
/* Opcode: MoveLe P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  2918
**
dvander@1203
  2919
** Pop the top of the stack and use its value as a key.  Reposition
dvander@1203
  2920
** cursor P1 so that it points to the largest entry that is less than
dvander@1203
  2921
** or equal to the key that was popped from the stack.
dvander@1203
  2922
** If there are no records less than or eqal to the key and P2 is not zero,
dvander@1203
  2923
** then jump to P2.
dvander@1203
  2924
**
dvander@1203
  2925
** See also: Found, NotFound, Distinct, MoveGt, MoveGe, MoveLt
dvander@1203
  2926
*/
dvander@1203
  2927
case OP_MoveLt:         /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2928
case OP_MoveLe:         /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2929
case OP_MoveGe:         /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2930
case OP_MoveGt: {       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  2931
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  2932
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  2933
dvander@1203
  2934
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  2935
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  2936
  pC = p->apCsr[i];
dvander@1203
  2937
  assert( pC!=0 );
dvander@1203
  2938
  if( pC->pCursor!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  2939
    int res, oc;
dvander@1203
  2940
    oc = pOp->opcode;
dvander@1203
  2941
    pC->nullRow = 0;
dvander@1203
  2942
    *pC->pIncrKey = oc==OP_MoveGt || oc==OP_MoveLe;
dvander@1203
  2943
    if( pC->isTable ){
dvander@1203
  2944
      i64 iKey;
dvander@1203
  2945
      sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  2946
      iKey = intToKey(pTos->u.i);
dvander@1203
  2947
      if( pOp->p2==0 && pOp->opcode==OP_MoveGe ){
dvander@1203
  2948
        pC->movetoTarget = iKey;
dvander@1203
  2949
        pC->deferredMoveto = 1;
dvander@1203
  2950
        assert( (pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 );
dvander@1203
  2951
        pTos--;
dvander@1203
  2952
        break;
dvander@1203
  2953
      }
dvander@1203
  2954
      rc = sqlite3BtreeMoveto(pC->pCursor, 0, (u64)iKey, 0, &res);
dvander@1203
  2955
      if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  2956
        goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2957
      }
dvander@1203
  2958
      pC->lastRowid = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  2959
      pC->rowidIsValid = res==0;
dvander@1203
  2960
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2961
      assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Blob );
dvander@1203
  2962
      ExpandBlob(pTos);
dvander@1203
  2963
      rc = sqlite3BtreeMoveto(pC->pCursor, pTos->z, pTos->n, 0, &res);
dvander@1203
  2964
      if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  2965
        goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2966
      }
dvander@1203
  2967
      pC->rowidIsValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  2968
    }
dvander@1203
  2969
    pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
dvander@1203
  2970
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  2971
    *pC->pIncrKey = 0;
dvander@1203
  2972
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
  2973
    sqlite3_search_count++;
dvander@1203
  2974
#endif
dvander@1203
  2975
    if( oc==OP_MoveGe || oc==OP_MoveGt ){
dvander@1203
  2976
      if( res<0 ){
dvander@1203
  2977
        rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pC->pCursor, &res);
dvander@1203
  2978
        if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2979
        pC->rowidIsValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  2980
      }else{
dvander@1203
  2981
        res = 0;
dvander@1203
  2982
      }
dvander@1203
  2983
    }else{
dvander@1203
  2984
      assert( oc==OP_MoveLt || oc==OP_MoveLe );
dvander@1203
  2985
      if( res>=0 ){
dvander@1203
  2986
        rc = sqlite3BtreePrevious(pC->pCursor, &res);
dvander@1203
  2987
        if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  2988
        pC->rowidIsValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  2989
      }else{
dvander@1203
  2990
        /* res might be negative because the table is empty.  Check to
dvander@1203
  2991
        ** see if this is the case.
dvander@1203
  2992
        */
dvander@1203
  2993
        res = sqlite3BtreeEof(pC->pCursor);
dvander@1203
  2994
      }
dvander@1203
  2995
    }
dvander@1203
  2996
    if( res ){
dvander@1203
  2997
      if( pOp->p2>0 ){
dvander@1203
  2998
        pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  2999
      }else{
dvander@1203
  3000
        pC->nullRow = 1;
dvander@1203
  3001
      }
dvander@1203
  3002
    }
dvander@1203
  3003
  }
dvander@1203
  3004
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  3005
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  3006
  break;
dvander@1203
  3007
}
dvander@1203
  3008
dvander@1203
  3009
/* Opcode: Distinct P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3010
**
dvander@1203
  3011
** Use the top of the stack as a record created using MakeRecord.  P1 is a
dvander@1203
  3012
** cursor on a table that declared as an index.  If that table contains an
dvander@1203
  3013
** entry that matches the top of the stack fall thru.  If the top of the stack
dvander@1203
  3014
** matches no entry in P1 then jump to P2.
dvander@1203
  3015
**
dvander@1203
  3016
** The cursor is left pointing at the matching entry if it exists.  The
dvander@1203
  3017
** record on the top of the stack is not popped.
dvander@1203
  3018
**
dvander@1203
  3019
** This instruction is similar to NotFound except that this operation
dvander@1203
  3020
** does not pop the key from the stack.
dvander@1203
  3021
**
dvander@1203
  3022
** The instruction is used to implement the DISTINCT operator on SELECT
dvander@1203
  3023
** statements.  The P1 table is not a true index but rather a record of
dvander@1203
  3024
** all results that have produced so far.  
dvander@1203
  3025
**
dvander@1203
  3026
** See also: Found, NotFound, MoveTo, IsUnique, NotExists
dvander@1203
  3027
*/
dvander@1203
  3028
/* Opcode: Found P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3029
**
dvander@1203
  3030
** Top of the stack holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  P1 is an index.
dvander@1203
  3031
** If an entry that matches the top of the stack exists in P1 then
dvander@1203
  3032
** jump to P2.  If the top of the stack does not match any entry in P1
dvander@1203
  3033
** then fall thru.  The P1 cursor is left pointing at the matching entry
dvander@1203
  3034
** if it exists.  The blob is popped off the top of the stack.
dvander@1203
  3035
**
dvander@1203
  3036
** This instruction is used to implement the IN operator where the
dvander@1203
  3037
** left-hand side is a SELECT statement.  P1 is not a true index but
dvander@1203
  3038
** is instead a temporary index that holds the results of the SELECT
dvander@1203
  3039
** statement.  This instruction just checks to see if the left-hand side
dvander@1203
  3040
** of the IN operator (stored on the top of the stack) exists in the
dvander@1203
  3041
** result of the SELECT statement.
dvander@1203
  3042
**
dvander@1203
  3043
** See also: Distinct, NotFound, MoveTo, IsUnique, NotExists
dvander@1203
  3044
*/
dvander@1203
  3045
/* Opcode: NotFound P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3046
**
dvander@1203
  3047
** The top of the stack holds a blob constructed by MakeRecord.  P1 is
dvander@1203
  3048
** an index.  If no entry exists in P1 that matches the blob then jump
dvander@1203
  3049
** to P2.  If an entry does existing, fall through.  The cursor is left
dvander@1203
  3050
** pointing to the entry that matches.  The blob is popped from the stack.
dvander@1203
  3051
**
dvander@1203
  3052
** The difference between this operation and Distinct is that
dvander@1203
  3053
** Distinct does not pop the key from the stack.
dvander@1203
  3054
**
dvander@1203
  3055
** See also: Distinct, Found, MoveTo, NotExists, IsUnique
dvander@1203
  3056
*/
dvander@1203
  3057
case OP_Distinct:       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3058
case OP_NotFound:       /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3059
case OP_Found: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3060
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3061
  int alreadyExists = 0;
dvander@1203
  3062
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3063
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  3064
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3065
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3066
  if( (pC = p->apCsr[i])->pCursor!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3067
    int res, rx;
dvander@1203
  3068
    assert( pC->isTable==0 );
dvander@1203
  3069
    assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Blob );
dvander@1203
  3070
    Stringify(pTos, encoding);
dvander@1203
  3071
    rx = sqlite3BtreeMoveto(pC->pCursor, pTos->z, pTos->n, 0, &res);
dvander@1203
  3072
    alreadyExists = rx==SQLITE_OK && res==0;
dvander@1203
  3073
    pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
dvander@1203
  3074
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3075
  }
dvander@1203
  3076
  if( pOp->opcode==OP_Found ){
dvander@1203
  3077
    if( alreadyExists ) pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3078
  }else{
dvander@1203
  3079
    if( !alreadyExists ) pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3080
  }
dvander@1203
  3081
  if( pOp->opcode!=OP_Distinct ){
dvander@1203
  3082
    Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  3083
    pTos--;
dvander@1203
  3084
  }
dvander@1203
  3085
  break;
dvander@1203
  3086
}
dvander@1203
  3087
dvander@1203
  3088
/* Opcode: IsUnique P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3089
**
dvander@1203
  3090
** The top of the stack is an integer record number.  Call this
dvander@1203
  3091
** record number R.  The next on the stack is an index key created
dvander@1203
  3092
** using MakeIdxRec.  Call it K.  This instruction pops R from the
dvander@1203
  3093
** stack but it leaves K unchanged.
dvander@1203
  3094
**
dvander@1203
  3095
** P1 is an index.  So it has no data and its key consists of a
dvander@1203
  3096
** record generated by OP_MakeRecord where the last field is the 
dvander@1203
  3097
** rowid of the entry that the index refers to.
dvander@1203
  3098
** 
dvander@1203
  3099
** This instruction asks if there is an entry in P1 where the
dvander@1203
  3100
** fields matches K but the rowid is different from R.
dvander@1203
  3101
** If there is no such entry, then there is an immediate
dvander@1203
  3102
** jump to P2.  If any entry does exist where the index string
dvander@1203
  3103
** matches K but the record number is not R, then the record
dvander@1203
  3104
** number for that entry is pushed onto the stack and control
dvander@1203
  3105
** falls through to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  3106
**
dvander@1203
  3107
** See also: Distinct, NotFound, NotExists, Found
dvander@1203
  3108
*/
dvander@1203
  3109
case OP_IsUnique: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3110
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3111
  Mem *pNos = &pTos[-1];
dvander@1203
  3112
  Cursor *pCx;
dvander@1203
  3113
  BtCursor *pCrsr;
dvander@1203
  3114
  i64 R;
dvander@1203
  3115
dvander@1203
  3116
  /* Pop the value R off the top of the stack
dvander@1203
  3117
  */
dvander@1203
  3118
  assert( pNos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  3119
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  3120
  R = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  3121
  assert( (pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 );
dvander@1203
  3122
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  3123
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3124
  pCx = p->apCsr[i];
dvander@1203
  3125
  assert( pCx!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3126
  pCrsr = pCx->pCursor;
dvander@1203
  3127
  if( pCrsr!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3128
    int res;
dvander@1203
  3129
    i64 v;         /* The record number on the P1 entry that matches K */
dvander@1203
  3130
    char *zKey;    /* The value of K */
dvander@1203
  3131
    int nKey;      /* Number of bytes in K */
dvander@1203
  3132
    int len;       /* Number of bytes in K without the rowid at the end */
dvander@1203
  3133
    int szRowid;   /* Size of the rowid column at the end of zKey */
dvander@1203
  3134
dvander@1203
  3135
    /* Make sure K is a string and make zKey point to K
dvander@1203
  3136
    */
dvander@1203
  3137
    assert( pNos->flags & MEM_Blob );
dvander@1203
  3138
    Stringify(pNos, encoding);
dvander@1203
  3139
    zKey = pNos->z;
dvander@1203
  3140
    nKey = pNos->n;
dvander@1203
  3141
dvander@1203
  3142
    szRowid = sqlite3VdbeIdxRowidLen((u8*)zKey);
dvander@1203
  3143
    len = nKey-szRowid;
dvander@1203
  3144
dvander@1203
  3145
    /* Search for an entry in P1 where all but the last four bytes match K.
dvander@1203
  3146
    ** If there is no such entry, jump immediately to P2.
dvander@1203
  3147
    */
dvander@1203
  3148
    assert( pCx->deferredMoveto==0 );
dvander@1203
  3149
    pCx->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3150
    rc = sqlite3BtreeMoveto(pCrsr, zKey, len, 0, &res);
dvander@1203
  3151
    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  3152
      goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3153
    }
dvander@1203
  3154
    if( res<0 ){
dvander@1203
  3155
      rc = sqlite3BtreeNext(pCrsr, &res);
dvander@1203
  3156
      if( res ){
dvander@1203
  3157
        pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3158
        break;
dvander@1203
  3159
      }
dvander@1203
  3160
    }
dvander@1203
  3161
    rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(pCx, len, (u8*)zKey, &res); 
dvander@1203
  3162
    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ) goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3163
    if( res>0 ){
dvander@1203
  3164
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3165
      break;
dvander@1203
  3166
    }
dvander@1203
  3167
dvander@1203
  3168
    /* At this point, pCrsr is pointing to an entry in P1 where all but
dvander@1203
  3169
    ** the final entry (the rowid) matches K.  Check to see if the
dvander@1203
  3170
    ** final rowid column is different from R.  If it equals R then jump
dvander@1203
  3171
    ** immediately to P2.
dvander@1203
  3172
    */
dvander@1203
  3173
    rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(pCrsr, &v);
dvander@1203
  3174
    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  3175
      goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3176
    }
dvander@1203
  3177
    if( v==R ){
dvander@1203
  3178
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3179
      break;
dvander@1203
  3180
    }
dvander@1203
  3181
dvander@1203
  3182
    /* The final varint of the key is different from R.  Push it onto
dvander@1203
  3183
    ** the stack.  (The record number of an entry that violates a UNIQUE
dvander@1203
  3184
    ** constraint.)
dvander@1203
  3185
    */
dvander@1203
  3186
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  3187
    pTos->u.i = v;
dvander@1203
  3188
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  3189
  }
dvander@1203
  3190
  break;
dvander@1203
  3191
}
dvander@1203
  3192
dvander@1203
  3193
/* Opcode: NotExists P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3194
**
dvander@1203
  3195
** Use the top of the stack as a integer key.  If a record with that key
dvander@1203
  3196
** does not exist in table of P1, then jump to P2.  If the record
dvander@1203
  3197
** does exist, then fall thru.  The cursor is left pointing to the
dvander@1203
  3198
** record if it exists.  The integer key is popped from the stack.
dvander@1203
  3199
**
dvander@1203
  3200
** The difference between this operation and NotFound is that this
dvander@1203
  3201
** operation assumes the key is an integer and that P1 is a table whereas
dvander@1203
  3202
** NotFound assumes key is a blob constructed from MakeRecord and
dvander@1203
  3203
** P1 is an index.
dvander@1203
  3204
**
dvander@1203
  3205
** See also: Distinct, Found, MoveTo, NotFound, IsUnique
dvander@1203
  3206
*/
dvander@1203
  3207
case OP_NotExists: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3208
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3209
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3210
  BtCursor *pCrsr;
dvander@1203
  3211
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  3212
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3213
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3214
  if( (pCrsr = (pC = p->apCsr[i])->pCursor)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3215
    int res;
dvander@1203
  3216
    u64 iKey;
dvander@1203
  3217
    assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Int );
dvander@1203
  3218
    assert( p->apCsr[i]->isTable );
dvander@1203
  3219
    iKey = intToKey(pTos->u.i);
dvander@1203
  3220
    rc = sqlite3BtreeMoveto(pCrsr, 0, iKey, 0,&res);
dvander@1203
  3221
    pC->lastRowid = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  3222
    pC->rowidIsValid = res==0;
dvander@1203
  3223
    pC->nullRow = 0;
dvander@1203
  3224
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3225
    /* res might be uninitialized if rc!=SQLITE_OK.  But if rc!=SQLITE_OK
dvander@1203
  3226
    ** processing is about to abort so we really do not care whether or not
dvander@1203
  3227
    ** the following jump is taken.  (In other words, do not stress over
dvander@1203
  3228
    ** the error that valgrind sometimes shows on the next statement when
dvander@1203
  3229
    ** running ioerr.test and similar failure-recovery test scripts.) */
dvander@1203
  3230
    if( res!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3231
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3232
      pC->rowidIsValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  3233
    }
dvander@1203
  3234
  }
dvander@1203
  3235
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  3236
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  3237
  break;
dvander@1203
  3238
}
dvander@1203
  3239
dvander@1203
  3240
/* Opcode: Sequence P1 * *
dvander@1203
  3241
**
dvander@1203
  3242
** Push an integer onto the stack which is the next available
dvander@1203
  3243
** sequence number for cursor P1.  The sequence number on the
dvander@1203
  3244
** cursor is incremented after the push.
dvander@1203
  3245
*/
dvander@1203
  3246
case OP_Sequence: {
dvander@1203
  3247
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3248
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  3249
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3250
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3251
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  3252
  pTos->u.i = p->apCsr[i]->seqCount++;
dvander@1203
  3253
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  3254
  break;
dvander@1203
  3255
}
dvander@1203
  3256
dvander@1203
  3257
dvander@1203
  3258
/* Opcode: NewRowid P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3259
**
dvander@1203
  3260
** Get a new integer record number (a.k.a "rowid") used as the key to a table.
dvander@1203
  3261
** The record number is not previously used as a key in the database
dvander@1203
  3262
** table that cursor P1 points to.  The new record number is pushed 
dvander@1203
  3263
** onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  3264
**
dvander@1203
  3265
** If P2>0 then P2 is a memory cell that holds the largest previously
dvander@1203
  3266
** generated record number.  No new record numbers are allowed to be less
dvander@1203
  3267
** than this value.  When this value reaches its maximum, a SQLITE_FULL
dvander@1203
  3268
** error is generated.  The P2 memory cell is updated with the generated
dvander@1203
  3269
** record number.  This P2 mechanism is used to help implement the
dvander@1203
  3270
** AUTOINCREMENT feature.
dvander@1203
  3271
*/
dvander@1203
  3272
case OP_NewRowid: {
dvander@1203
  3273
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3274
  i64 v = 0;
dvander@1203
  3275
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3276
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3277
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3278
  if( (pC = p->apCsr[i])->pCursor==0 ){
dvander@1203
  3279
    /* The zero initialization above is all that is needed */
dvander@1203
  3280
  }else{
dvander@1203
  3281
    /* The next rowid or record number (different terms for the same
dvander@1203
  3282
    ** thing) is obtained in a two-step algorithm.
dvander@1203
  3283
    **
dvander@1203
  3284
    ** First we attempt to find the largest existing rowid and add one
dvander@1203
  3285
    ** to that.  But if the largest existing rowid is already the maximum
dvander@1203
  3286
    ** positive integer, we have to fall through to the second
dvander@1203
  3287
    ** probabilistic algorithm
dvander@1203
  3288
    **
dvander@1203
  3289
    ** The second algorithm is to select a rowid at random and see if
dvander@1203
  3290
    ** it already exists in the table.  If it does not exist, we have
dvander@1203
  3291
    ** succeeded.  If the random rowid does exist, we select a new one
dvander@1203
  3292
    ** and try again, up to 1000 times.
dvander@1203
  3293
    **
dvander@1203
  3294
    ** For a table with less than 2 billion entries, the probability
dvander@1203
  3295
    ** of not finding a unused rowid is about 1.0e-300.  This is a 
dvander@1203
  3296
    ** non-zero probability, but it is still vanishingly small and should
dvander@1203
  3297
    ** never cause a problem.  You are much, much more likely to have a
dvander@1203
  3298
    ** hardware failure than for this algorithm to fail.
dvander@1203
  3299
    **
dvander@1203
  3300
    ** The analysis in the previous paragraph assumes that you have a good
dvander@1203
  3301
    ** source of random numbers.  Is a library function like lrand48()
dvander@1203
  3302
    ** good enough?  Maybe. Maybe not. It's hard to know whether there
dvander@1203
  3303
    ** might be subtle bugs is some implementations of lrand48() that
dvander@1203
  3304
    ** could cause problems. To avoid uncertainty, SQLite uses its own 
dvander@1203
  3305
    ** random number generator based on the RC4 algorithm.
dvander@1203
  3306
    **
dvander@1203
  3307
    ** To promote locality of reference for repetitive inserts, the
dvander@1203
  3308
    ** first few attempts at chosing a random rowid pick values just a little
dvander@1203
  3309
    ** larger than the previous rowid.  This has been shown experimentally
dvander@1203
  3310
    ** to double the speed of the COPY operation.
dvander@1203
  3311
    */
dvander@1203
  3312
    int res, rx=SQLITE_OK, cnt;
dvander@1203
  3313
    i64 x;
dvander@1203
  3314
    cnt = 0;
dvander@1203
  3315
    if( (sqlite3BtreeFlags(pC->pCursor)&(BTREE_INTKEY|BTREE_ZERODATA)) !=
dvander@1203
  3316
          BTREE_INTKEY ){
dvander@1203
  3317
      rc = SQLITE_CORRUPT_BKPT;
dvander@1203
  3318
      goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3319
    }
dvander@1203
  3320
    assert( (sqlite3BtreeFlags(pC->pCursor) & BTREE_INTKEY)!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3321
    assert( (sqlite3BtreeFlags(pC->pCursor) & BTREE_ZERODATA)==0 );
dvander@1203
  3322
dvander@1203
  3323
#ifdef SQLITE_32BIT_ROWID
dvander@1203
  3324
#   define MAX_ROWID 0x7fffffff
dvander@1203
  3325
#else
dvander@1203
  3326
    /* Some compilers complain about constants of the form 0x7fffffffffffffff.
dvander@1203
  3327
    ** Others complain about 0x7ffffffffffffffffLL.  The following macro seems
dvander@1203
  3328
    ** to provide the constant while making all compilers happy.
dvander@1203
  3329
    */
dvander@1203
  3330
#   define MAX_ROWID  ( (((u64)0x7fffffff)<<32) | (u64)0xffffffff )
dvander@1203
  3331
#endif
dvander@1203
  3332
dvander@1203
  3333
    if( !pC->useRandomRowid ){
dvander@1203
  3334
      if( pC->nextRowidValid ){
dvander@1203
  3335
        v = pC->nextRowid;
dvander@1203
  3336
      }else{
dvander@1203
  3337
        rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pC->pCursor, &res);
dvander@1203
  3338
        if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  3339
          goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3340
        }
dvander@1203
  3341
        if( res ){
dvander@1203
  3342
          v = 1;
dvander@1203
  3343
        }else{
dvander@1203
  3344
          sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pC->pCursor, &v);
dvander@1203
  3345
          v = keyToInt(v);
dvander@1203
  3346
          if( v==MAX_ROWID ){
dvander@1203
  3347
            pC->useRandomRowid = 1;
dvander@1203
  3348
          }else{
dvander@1203
  3349
            v++;
dvander@1203
  3350
          }
dvander@1203
  3351
        }
dvander@1203
  3352
      }
dvander@1203
  3353
dvander@1203
  3354
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
dvander@1203
  3355
      if( pOp->p2 ){
dvander@1203
  3356
        Mem *pMem;
dvander@1203
  3357
        assert( pOp->p2>0 && pOp->p2<p->nMem );  /* P2 is a valid memory cell */
dvander@1203
  3358
        pMem = &p->aMem[pOp->p2];
dvander@1203
  3359
        sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pMem);
dvander@1203
  3360
        assert( (pMem->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 );  /* mem(P2) holds an integer */
dvander@1203
  3361
        if( pMem->u.i==MAX_ROWID || pC->useRandomRowid ){
dvander@1203
  3362
          rc = SQLITE_FULL;
dvander@1203
  3363
          goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3364
        }
dvander@1203
  3365
        if( v<pMem->u.i+1 ){
dvander@1203
  3366
          v = pMem->u.i + 1;
dvander@1203
  3367
        }
dvander@1203
  3368
        pMem->u.i = v;
dvander@1203
  3369
      }
dvander@1203
  3370
#endif
dvander@1203
  3371
dvander@1203
  3372
      if( v<MAX_ROWID ){
dvander@1203
  3373
        pC->nextRowidValid = 1;
dvander@1203
  3374
        pC->nextRowid = v+1;
dvander@1203
  3375
      }else{
dvander@1203
  3376
        pC->nextRowidValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  3377
      }
dvander@1203
  3378
    }
dvander@1203
  3379
    if( pC->useRandomRowid ){
dvander@1203
  3380
      assert( pOp->p2==0 );  /* SQLITE_FULL must have occurred prior to this */
dvander@1203
  3381
      v = db->priorNewRowid;
dvander@1203
  3382
      cnt = 0;
dvander@1203
  3383
      do{
dvander@1203
  3384
        if( v==0 || cnt>2 ){
dvander@1203
  3385
          sqlite3Randomness(sizeof(v), &v);
dvander@1203
  3386
          if( cnt<5 ) v &= 0xffffff;
dvander@1203
  3387
        }else{
dvander@1203
  3388
          unsigned char r;
dvander@1203
  3389
          sqlite3Randomness(1, &r);
dvander@1203
  3390
          v += r + 1;
dvander@1203
  3391
        }
dvander@1203
  3392
        if( v==0 ) continue;
dvander@1203
  3393
        x = intToKey(v);
dvander@1203
  3394
        rx = sqlite3BtreeMoveto(pC->pCursor, 0, (u64)x, 0, &res);
dvander@1203
  3395
        cnt++;
dvander@1203
  3396
      }while( cnt<1000 && rx==SQLITE_OK && res==0 );
dvander@1203
  3397
      db->priorNewRowid = v;
dvander@1203
  3398
      if( rx==SQLITE_OK && res==0 ){
dvander@1203
  3399
        rc = SQLITE_FULL;
dvander@1203
  3400
        goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3401
      }
dvander@1203
  3402
    }
dvander@1203
  3403
    pC->rowidIsValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  3404
    pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
dvander@1203
  3405
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3406
  }
dvander@1203
  3407
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  3408
  pTos->u.i = v;
dvander@1203
  3409
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  3410
  break;
dvander@1203
  3411
}
dvander@1203
  3412
dvander@1203
  3413
/* Opcode: Insert P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  3414
**
dvander@1203
  3415
** Write an entry into the table of cursor P1.  A new entry is
dvander@1203
  3416
** created if it doesn't already exist or the data for an existing
dvander@1203
  3417
** entry is overwritten.  The data is the value on the top of the
dvander@1203
  3418
** stack.  The key is the next value down on the stack.  The key must
dvander@1203
  3419
** be an integer.  The stack is popped twice by this instruction.
dvander@1203
  3420
**
dvander@1203
  3421
** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P2 is set, then the row change count is
dvander@1203
  3422
** incremented (otherwise not).  If the OPFLAG_LASTROWID flag of P2 is set,
dvander@1203
  3423
** then rowid is stored for subsequent return by the
dvander@1203
  3424
** sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() function (otherwise it's unmodified).
dvander@1203
  3425
**
dvander@1203
  3426
** Parameter P3 may point to a string containing the table-name, or
dvander@1203
  3427
** may be NULL. If it is not NULL, then the update-hook 
dvander@1203
  3428
** (sqlite3.xUpdateCallback) is invoked following a successful insert.
dvander@1203
  3429
**
dvander@1203
  3430
** This instruction only works on tables.  The equivalent instruction
dvander@1203
  3431
** for indices is OP_IdxInsert.
dvander@1203
  3432
*/
dvander@1203
  3433
case OP_Insert: {         /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3434
  Mem *pNos = &pTos[-1];
dvander@1203
  3435
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3436
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3437
  assert( pNos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  3438
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3439
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3440
  if( ((pC = p->apCsr[i])->pCursor!=0 || pC->pseudoTable) ){
dvander@1203
  3441
    i64 iKey;   /* The integer ROWID or key for the record to be inserted */
dvander@1203
  3442
dvander@1203
  3443
    assert( pNos->flags & MEM_Int );
dvander@1203
  3444
    assert( pC->isTable );
dvander@1203
  3445
    iKey = intToKey(pNos->u.i);
dvander@1203
  3446
dvander@1203
  3447
    if( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++;
dvander@1203
  3448
    if( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_LASTROWID ) db->lastRowid = pNos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  3449
    if( pC->nextRowidValid && pNos->u.i>=pC->nextRowid ){
dvander@1203
  3450
      pC->nextRowidValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  3451
    }
dvander@1203
  3452
    if( pTos->flags & MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  3453
      pTos->z = 0;
dvander@1203
  3454
      pTos->n = 0;
dvander@1203
  3455
    }else{
dvander@1203
  3456
      assert( pTos->flags & (MEM_Blob|MEM_Str) );
dvander@1203
  3457
    }
dvander@1203
  3458
    if( pC->pseudoTable ){
dvander@1203
  3459
      sqliteFree(pC->pData);
dvander@1203
  3460
      pC->iKey = iKey;
dvander@1203
  3461
      pC->nData = pTos->n;
dvander@1203
  3462
      if( pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn ){
dvander@1203
  3463
        pC->pData = pTos->z;
dvander@1203
  3464
        pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  3465
      }else{
dvander@1203
  3466
        pC->pData = sqliteMallocRaw( pC->nData+2 );
dvander@1203
  3467
        if( !pC->pData ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  3468
        memcpy(pC->pData, pTos->z, pC->nData);
dvander@1203
  3469
        pC->pData[pC->nData] = 0;
dvander@1203
  3470
        pC->pData[pC->nData+1] = 0;
dvander@1203
  3471
      }
dvander@1203
  3472
      pC->nullRow = 0;
dvander@1203
  3473
    }else{
dvander@1203
  3474
      int nZero;
dvander@1203
  3475
      if( pTos->flags & MEM_Zero ){
dvander@1203
  3476
        nZero = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  3477
      }else{
dvander@1203
  3478
        nZero = 0;
dvander@1203
  3479
      }
dvander@1203
  3480
      rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pC->pCursor, 0, iKey,
dvander@1203
  3481
                              pTos->z, pTos->n, nZero,
dvander@1203
  3482
                              pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_APPEND);
dvander@1203
  3483
    }
dvander@1203
  3484
    
dvander@1203
  3485
    pC->rowidIsValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  3486
    pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
dvander@1203
  3487
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3488
dvander@1203
  3489
    /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */
dvander@1203
  3490
    if( rc==SQLITE_OK && db->xUpdateCallback && pOp->p3 ){
dvander@1203
  3491
      const char *zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zName;
dvander@1203
  3492
      const char *zTbl = pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  3493
      int op = ((pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_ISUPDATE) ? SQLITE_UPDATE : SQLITE_INSERT);
dvander@1203
  3494
      assert( pC->isTable );
dvander@1203
  3495
      db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, op, zDb, zTbl, iKey);
dvander@1203
  3496
      assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
dvander@1203
  3497
    }
dvander@1203
  3498
  }
dvander@1203
  3499
  popStack(&pTos, 2);
dvander@1203
  3500
dvander@1203
  3501
  break;
dvander@1203
  3502
}
dvander@1203
  3503
dvander@1203
  3504
/* Opcode: Delete P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  3505
**
dvander@1203
  3506
** Delete the record at which the P1 cursor is currently pointing.
dvander@1203
  3507
**
dvander@1203
  3508
** The cursor will be left pointing at either the next or the previous
dvander@1203
  3509
** record in the table. If it is left pointing at the next record, then
dvander@1203
  3510
** the next Next instruction will be a no-op.  Hence it is OK to delete
dvander@1203
  3511
** a record from within an Next loop.
dvander@1203
  3512
**
dvander@1203
  3513
** If the OPFLAG_NCHANGE flag of P2 is set, then the row change count is
dvander@1203
  3514
** incremented (otherwise not).
dvander@1203
  3515
**
dvander@1203
  3516
** If P1 is a pseudo-table, then this instruction is a no-op.
dvander@1203
  3517
*/
dvander@1203
  3518
case OP_Delete: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3519
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3520
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3521
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3522
  pC = p->apCsr[i];
dvander@1203
  3523
  assert( pC!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3524
  if( pC->pCursor!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3525
    i64 iKey;
dvander@1203
  3526
dvander@1203
  3527
    /* If the update-hook will be invoked, set iKey to the rowid of the
dvander@1203
  3528
    ** row being deleted.
dvander@1203
  3529
    */
dvander@1203
  3530
    if( db->xUpdateCallback && pOp->p3 ){
dvander@1203
  3531
      assert( pC->isTable );
dvander@1203
  3532
      if( pC->rowidIsValid ){
dvander@1203
  3533
        iKey = pC->lastRowid;
dvander@1203
  3534
      }else{
dvander@1203
  3535
        rc = sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pC->pCursor, &iKey);
dvander@1203
  3536
        if( rc ){
dvander@1203
  3537
          goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3538
        }
dvander@1203
  3539
        iKey = keyToInt(iKey);
dvander@1203
  3540
      }
dvander@1203
  3541
    }
dvander@1203
  3542
dvander@1203
  3543
    rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(pC);
dvander@1203
  3544
    if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3545
    rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pC->pCursor);
dvander@1203
  3546
    pC->nextRowidValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  3547
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3548
dvander@1203
  3549
    /* Invoke the update-hook if required. */
dvander@1203
  3550
    if( rc==SQLITE_OK && db->xUpdateCallback && pOp->p3 ){
dvander@1203
  3551
      const char *zDb = db->aDb[pC->iDb].zName;
dvander@1203
  3552
      const char *zTbl = pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  3553
      db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, SQLITE_DELETE, zDb, zTbl, iKey);
dvander@1203
  3554
      assert( pC->iDb>=0 );
dvander@1203
  3555
    }
dvander@1203
  3556
  }
dvander@1203
  3557
  if( pOp->p2 & OPFLAG_NCHANGE ) p->nChange++;
dvander@1203
  3558
  break;
dvander@1203
  3559
}
dvander@1203
  3560
dvander@1203
  3561
/* Opcode: ResetCount P1 * *
dvander@1203
  3562
**
dvander@1203
  3563
** This opcode resets the VMs internal change counter to 0. If P1 is true,
dvander@1203
  3564
** then the value of the change counter is copied to the database handle
dvander@1203
  3565
** change counter (returned by subsequent calls to sqlite3_changes())
dvander@1203
  3566
** before it is reset. This is used by trigger programs.
dvander@1203
  3567
*/
dvander@1203
  3568
case OP_ResetCount: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3569
  if( pOp->p1 ){
dvander@1203
  3570
    sqlite3VdbeSetChanges(db, p->nChange);
dvander@1203
  3571
  }
dvander@1203
  3572
  p->nChange = 0;
dvander@1203
  3573
  break;
dvander@1203
  3574
}
dvander@1203
  3575
dvander@1203
  3576
/* Opcode: RowData P1 * *
dvander@1203
  3577
**
dvander@1203
  3578
** Push onto the stack the complete row data for cursor P1.
dvander@1203
  3579
** There is no interpretation of the data.  It is just copied
dvander@1203
  3580
** onto the stack exactly as it is found in the database file.
dvander@1203
  3581
**
dvander@1203
  3582
** If the cursor is not pointing to a valid row, a NULL is pushed
dvander@1203
  3583
** onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  3584
*/
dvander@1203
  3585
/* Opcode: RowKey P1 * *
dvander@1203
  3586
**
dvander@1203
  3587
** Push onto the stack the complete row key for cursor P1.
dvander@1203
  3588
** There is no interpretation of the key.  It is just copied
dvander@1203
  3589
** onto the stack exactly as it is found in the database file.
dvander@1203
  3590
**
dvander@1203
  3591
** If the cursor is not pointing to a valid row, a NULL is pushed
dvander@1203
  3592
** onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  3593
*/
dvander@1203
  3594
case OP_RowKey:
dvander@1203
  3595
case OP_RowData: {
dvander@1203
  3596
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3597
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3598
  u32 n;
dvander@1203
  3599
dvander@1203
  3600
  /* Note that RowKey and RowData are really exactly the same instruction */
dvander@1203
  3601
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  3602
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3603
  pC = p->apCsr[i];
dvander@1203
  3604
  assert( pC->isTable || pOp->opcode==OP_RowKey );
dvander@1203
  3605
  assert( pC->isIndex || pOp->opcode==OP_RowData );
dvander@1203
  3606
  assert( pC!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3607
  if( pC->nullRow ){
dvander@1203
  3608
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  3609
  }else if( pC->pCursor!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3610
    BtCursor *pCrsr = pC->pCursor;
dvander@1203
  3611
    rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(pC);
dvander@1203
  3612
    if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3613
    if( pC->nullRow ){
dvander@1203
  3614
      pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  3615
      break;
dvander@1203
  3616
    }else if( pC->isIndex ){
dvander@1203
  3617
      i64 n64;
dvander@1203
  3618
      assert( !pC->isTable );
dvander@1203
  3619
      sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pCrsr, &n64);
dvander@1203
  3620
      if( n64>SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ){
dvander@1203
  3621
        goto too_big;
dvander@1203
  3622
      }
dvander@1203
  3623
      n = n64;
dvander@1203
  3624
    }else{
dvander@1203
  3625
      sqlite3BtreeDataSize(pCrsr, &n);
dvander@1203
  3626
    }
dvander@1203
  3627
    if( n>SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH ){
dvander@1203
  3628
      goto too_big;
dvander@1203
  3629
    }
dvander@1203
  3630
    pTos->n = n;
dvander@1203
  3631
    if( n<=NBFS ){
dvander@1203
  3632
      pTos->flags = MEM_Blob | MEM_Short;
dvander@1203
  3633
      pTos->z = pTos->zShort;
dvander@1203
  3634
    }else{
dvander@1203
  3635
      char *z = sqliteMallocRaw( n );
dvander@1203
  3636
      if( z==0 ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  3637
      pTos->flags = MEM_Blob | MEM_Dyn;
dvander@1203
  3638
      pTos->xDel = 0;
dvander@1203
  3639
      pTos->z = z;
dvander@1203
  3640
    }
dvander@1203
  3641
    if( pC->isIndex ){
dvander@1203
  3642
      rc = sqlite3BtreeKey(pCrsr, 0, n, pTos->z);
dvander@1203
  3643
    }else{
dvander@1203
  3644
      rc = sqlite3BtreeData(pCrsr, 0, n, pTos->z);
dvander@1203
  3645
    }
dvander@1203
  3646
  }else if( pC->pseudoTable ){
dvander@1203
  3647
    pTos->n = pC->nData;
dvander@1203
  3648
    assert( pC->nData<=SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH );
dvander@1203
  3649
    pTos->z = pC->pData;
dvander@1203
  3650
    pTos->flags = MEM_Blob|MEM_Ephem;
dvander@1203
  3651
  }else{
dvander@1203
  3652
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  3653
  }
dvander@1203
  3654
  pTos->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;  /* In case the blob is ever cast to text */
dvander@1203
  3655
  break;
dvander@1203
  3656
}
dvander@1203
  3657
dvander@1203
  3658
/* Opcode: Rowid P1 * *
dvander@1203
  3659
**
dvander@1203
  3660
** Push onto the stack an integer which is the key of the table entry that
dvander@1203
  3661
** P1 is currently point to.
dvander@1203
  3662
*/
dvander@1203
  3663
case OP_Rowid: {
dvander@1203
  3664
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3665
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3666
  i64 v;
dvander@1203
  3667
dvander@1203
  3668
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3669
  pC = p->apCsr[i];
dvander@1203
  3670
  assert( pC!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3671
  rc = sqlite3VdbeCursorMoveto(pC);
dvander@1203
  3672
  if( rc ) goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3673
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  3674
  if( pC->rowidIsValid ){
dvander@1203
  3675
    v = pC->lastRowid;
dvander@1203
  3676
  }else if( pC->pseudoTable ){
dvander@1203
  3677
    v = keyToInt(pC->iKey);
dvander@1203
  3678
  }else if( pC->nullRow || pC->pCursor==0 ){
dvander@1203
  3679
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  3680
    break;
dvander@1203
  3681
  }else{
dvander@1203
  3682
    assert( pC->pCursor!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3683
    sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pC->pCursor, &v);
dvander@1203
  3684
    v = keyToInt(v);
dvander@1203
  3685
  }
dvander@1203
  3686
  pTos->u.i = v;
dvander@1203
  3687
  pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  3688
  break;
dvander@1203
  3689
}
dvander@1203
  3690
dvander@1203
  3691
/* Opcode: NullRow P1 * *
dvander@1203
  3692
**
dvander@1203
  3693
** Move the cursor P1 to a null row.  Any OP_Column operations
dvander@1203
  3694
** that occur while the cursor is on the null row will always push 
dvander@1203
  3695
** a NULL onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  3696
*/
dvander@1203
  3697
case OP_NullRow: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3698
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3699
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3700
dvander@1203
  3701
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3702
  pC = p->apCsr[i];
dvander@1203
  3703
  assert( pC!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3704
  pC->nullRow = 1;
dvander@1203
  3705
  pC->rowidIsValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  3706
  break;
dvander@1203
  3707
}
dvander@1203
  3708
dvander@1203
  3709
/* Opcode: Last P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3710
**
dvander@1203
  3711
** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 
dvander@1203
  3712
** will refer to the last entry in the database table or index.
dvander@1203
  3713
** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
dvander@1203
  3714
** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
dvander@1203
  3715
** to the following instruction.
dvander@1203
  3716
*/
dvander@1203
  3717
case OP_Last: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3718
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3719
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3720
  BtCursor *pCrsr;
dvander@1203
  3721
dvander@1203
  3722
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3723
  pC = p->apCsr[i];
dvander@1203
  3724
  assert( pC!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3725
  if( (pCrsr = pC->pCursor)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3726
    int res;
dvander@1203
  3727
    rc = sqlite3BtreeLast(pCrsr, &res);
dvander@1203
  3728
    pC->nullRow = res;
dvander@1203
  3729
    pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
dvander@1203
  3730
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3731
    if( res && pOp->p2>0 ){
dvander@1203
  3732
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3733
    }
dvander@1203
  3734
  }else{
dvander@1203
  3735
    pC->nullRow = 0;
dvander@1203
  3736
  }
dvander@1203
  3737
  break;
dvander@1203
  3738
}
dvander@1203
  3739
dvander@1203
  3740
dvander@1203
  3741
/* Opcode: Sort P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3742
**
dvander@1203
  3743
** This opcode does exactly the same thing as OP_Rewind except that
dvander@1203
  3744
** it increments an undocumented global variable used for testing.
dvander@1203
  3745
**
dvander@1203
  3746
** Sorting is accomplished by writing records into a sorting index,
dvander@1203
  3747
** then rewinding that index and playing it back from beginning to
dvander@1203
  3748
** end.  We use the OP_Sort opcode instead of OP_Rewind to do the
dvander@1203
  3749
** rewinding so that the global variable will be incremented and
dvander@1203
  3750
** regression tests can determine whether or not the optimizer is
dvander@1203
  3751
** correctly optimizing out sorts.
dvander@1203
  3752
*/
dvander@1203
  3753
case OP_Sort: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3754
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
  3755
  sqlite3_sort_count++;
dvander@1203
  3756
  sqlite3_search_count--;
dvander@1203
  3757
#endif
dvander@1203
  3758
  /* Fall through into OP_Rewind */
dvander@1203
  3759
}
dvander@1203
  3760
/* Opcode: Rewind P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3761
**
dvander@1203
  3762
** The next use of the Rowid or Column or Next instruction for P1 
dvander@1203
  3763
** will refer to the first entry in the database table or index.
dvander@1203
  3764
** If the table or index is empty and P2>0, then jump immediately to P2.
dvander@1203
  3765
** If P2 is 0 or if the table or index is not empty, fall through
dvander@1203
  3766
** to the following instruction.
dvander@1203
  3767
*/
dvander@1203
  3768
case OP_Rewind: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3769
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3770
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3771
  BtCursor *pCrsr;
dvander@1203
  3772
  int res;
dvander@1203
  3773
dvander@1203
  3774
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3775
  pC = p->apCsr[i];
dvander@1203
  3776
  assert( pC!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3777
  if( (pCrsr = pC->pCursor)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3778
    rc = sqlite3BtreeFirst(pCrsr, &res);
dvander@1203
  3779
    pC->atFirst = res==0;
dvander@1203
  3780
    pC->deferredMoveto = 0;
dvander@1203
  3781
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3782
  }else{
dvander@1203
  3783
    res = 1;
dvander@1203
  3784
  }
dvander@1203
  3785
  pC->nullRow = res;
dvander@1203
  3786
  if( res && pOp->p2>0 ){
dvander@1203
  3787
    pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3788
  }
dvander@1203
  3789
  break;
dvander@1203
  3790
}
dvander@1203
  3791
dvander@1203
  3792
/* Opcode: Next P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3793
**
dvander@1203
  3794
** Advance cursor P1 so that it points to the next key/data pair in its
dvander@1203
  3795
** table or index.  If there are no more key/value pairs then fall through
dvander@1203
  3796
** to the following instruction.  But if the cursor advance was successful,
dvander@1203
  3797
** jump immediately to P2.
dvander@1203
  3798
**
dvander@1203
  3799
** See also: Prev
dvander@1203
  3800
*/
dvander@1203
  3801
/* Opcode: Prev P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3802
**
dvander@1203
  3803
** Back up cursor P1 so that it points to the previous key/data pair in its
dvander@1203
  3804
** table or index.  If there is no previous key/value pairs then fall through
dvander@1203
  3805
** to the following instruction.  But if the cursor backup was successful,
dvander@1203
  3806
** jump immediately to P2.
dvander@1203
  3807
*/
dvander@1203
  3808
case OP_Prev:          /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3809
case OP_Next: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3810
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3811
  BtCursor *pCrsr;
dvander@1203
  3812
dvander@1203
  3813
  CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPT;
dvander@1203
  3814
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3815
  pC = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  3816
  if( pC==0 ){
dvander@1203
  3817
    break;  /* See ticket #2273 */
dvander@1203
  3818
  }
dvander@1203
  3819
  if( (pCrsr = pC->pCursor)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3820
    int res;
dvander@1203
  3821
    if( pC->nullRow ){
dvander@1203
  3822
      res = 1;
dvander@1203
  3823
    }else{
dvander@1203
  3824
      assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
dvander@1203
  3825
      rc = pOp->opcode==OP_Next ? sqlite3BtreeNext(pCrsr, &res) :
dvander@1203
  3826
                                  sqlite3BtreePrevious(pCrsr, &res);
dvander@1203
  3827
      pC->nullRow = res;
dvander@1203
  3828
      pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3829
    }
dvander@1203
  3830
    if( res==0 ){
dvander@1203
  3831
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  3832
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
  3833
      sqlite3_search_count++;
dvander@1203
  3834
#endif
dvander@1203
  3835
    }
dvander@1203
  3836
  }else{
dvander@1203
  3837
    pC->nullRow = 1;
dvander@1203
  3838
  }
dvander@1203
  3839
  pC->rowidIsValid = 0;
dvander@1203
  3840
  break;
dvander@1203
  3841
}
dvander@1203
  3842
dvander@1203
  3843
/* Opcode: IdxInsert P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3844
**
dvander@1203
  3845
** The top of the stack holds a SQL index key made using either the
dvander@1203
  3846
** MakeIdxRec or MakeRecord instructions.  This opcode writes that key
dvander@1203
  3847
** into the index P1.  Data for the entry is nil.
dvander@1203
  3848
**
dvander@1203
  3849
** P2 is a flag that provides a hint to the b-tree layer that this
dvander@1203
  3850
** insert is likely to be an append.
dvander@1203
  3851
**
dvander@1203
  3852
** This instruction only works for indices.  The equivalent instruction
dvander@1203
  3853
** for tables is OP_Insert.
dvander@1203
  3854
*/
dvander@1203
  3855
case OP_IdxInsert: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3856
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3857
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3858
  BtCursor *pCrsr;
dvander@1203
  3859
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  3860
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3861
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3862
  assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Blob );
dvander@1203
  3863
  if( (pCrsr = (pC = p->apCsr[i])->pCursor)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3864
    assert( pC->isTable==0 );
dvander@1203
  3865
    rc = ExpandBlob(pTos);
dvander@1203
  3866
    if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  3867
      int nKey = pTos->n;
dvander@1203
  3868
      const char *zKey = pTos->z;
dvander@1203
  3869
      rc = sqlite3BtreeInsert(pCrsr, zKey, nKey, "", 0, 0, pOp->p2);
dvander@1203
  3870
      assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
dvander@1203
  3871
      pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3872
    }
dvander@1203
  3873
  }
dvander@1203
  3874
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  3875
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  3876
  break;
dvander@1203
  3877
}
dvander@1203
  3878
dvander@1203
  3879
/* Opcode: IdxDelete P1 * *
dvander@1203
  3880
**
dvander@1203
  3881
** The top of the stack is an index key built using the either the
dvander@1203
  3882
** MakeIdxRec or MakeRecord opcodes.
dvander@1203
  3883
** This opcode removes that entry from the index.
dvander@1203
  3884
*/
dvander@1203
  3885
case OP_IdxDelete: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3886
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3887
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3888
  BtCursor *pCrsr;
dvander@1203
  3889
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  3890
  assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Blob );
dvander@1203
  3891
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3892
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3893
  if( (pCrsr = (pC = p->apCsr[i])->pCursor)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3894
    int res;
dvander@1203
  3895
    rc = sqlite3BtreeMoveto(pCrsr, pTos->z, pTos->n, 0, &res);
dvander@1203
  3896
    if( rc==SQLITE_OK && res==0 ){
dvander@1203
  3897
      rc = sqlite3BtreeDelete(pCrsr);
dvander@1203
  3898
    }
dvander@1203
  3899
    assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
dvander@1203
  3900
    pC->cacheStatus = CACHE_STALE;
dvander@1203
  3901
  }
dvander@1203
  3902
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  3903
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  3904
  break;
dvander@1203
  3905
}
dvander@1203
  3906
dvander@1203
  3907
/* Opcode: IdxRowid P1 * *
dvander@1203
  3908
**
dvander@1203
  3909
** Push onto the stack an integer which is the last entry in the record at
dvander@1203
  3910
** the end of the index key pointed to by cursor P1.  This integer should be
dvander@1203
  3911
** the rowid of the table entry to which this index entry points.
dvander@1203
  3912
**
dvander@1203
  3913
** See also: Rowid, MakeIdxRec.
dvander@1203
  3914
*/
dvander@1203
  3915
case OP_IdxRowid: {
dvander@1203
  3916
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3917
  BtCursor *pCrsr;
dvander@1203
  3918
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3919
dvander@1203
  3920
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3921
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3922
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  3923
  pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  3924
  if( (pCrsr = (pC = p->apCsr[i])->pCursor)!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3925
    i64 rowid;
dvander@1203
  3926
dvander@1203
  3927
    assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
dvander@1203
  3928
    assert( pC->isTable==0 );
dvander@1203
  3929
    if( pC->nullRow ){
dvander@1203
  3930
      pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  3931
    }else{
dvander@1203
  3932
      rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxRowid(pCrsr, &rowid);
dvander@1203
  3933
      if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  3934
        goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  3935
      }
dvander@1203
  3936
      pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  3937
      pTos->u.i = rowid;
dvander@1203
  3938
    }
dvander@1203
  3939
  }
dvander@1203
  3940
  break;
dvander@1203
  3941
}
dvander@1203
  3942
dvander@1203
  3943
/* Opcode: IdxGT P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  3944
**
dvander@1203
  3945
** The top of the stack is an index entry that omits the ROWID.  Compare
dvander@1203
  3946
** the top of stack against the index that P1 is currently pointing to.
dvander@1203
  3947
** Ignore the ROWID on the P1 index.
dvander@1203
  3948
**
dvander@1203
  3949
** The top of the stack might have fewer columns that P1.
dvander@1203
  3950
**
dvander@1203
  3951
** If the P1 index entry is greater than the top of the stack
dvander@1203
  3952
** then jump to P2.  Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  3953
** In either case, the stack is popped once.
dvander@1203
  3954
*/
dvander@1203
  3955
/* Opcode: IdxGE P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  3956
**
dvander@1203
  3957
** The top of the stack is an index entry that omits the ROWID.  Compare
dvander@1203
  3958
** the top of stack against the index that P1 is currently pointing to.
dvander@1203
  3959
** Ignore the ROWID on the P1 index.
dvander@1203
  3960
**
dvander@1203
  3961
** If the P1 index entry is greater than or equal to the top of the stack
dvander@1203
  3962
** then jump to P2.  Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  3963
** In either case, the stack is popped once.
dvander@1203
  3964
**
dvander@1203
  3965
** If P3 is the "+" string (or any other non-NULL string) then the
dvander@1203
  3966
** index taken from the top of the stack is temporarily increased by
dvander@1203
  3967
** an epsilon prior to the comparison.  This make the opcode work
dvander@1203
  3968
** like IdxGT except that if the key from the stack is a prefix of
dvander@1203
  3969
** the key in the cursor, the result is false whereas it would be
dvander@1203
  3970
** true with IdxGT.
dvander@1203
  3971
*/
dvander@1203
  3972
/* Opcode: IdxLT P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  3973
**
dvander@1203
  3974
** The top of the stack is an index entry that omits the ROWID.  Compare
dvander@1203
  3975
** the top of stack against the index that P1 is currently pointing to.
dvander@1203
  3976
** Ignore the ROWID on the P1 index.
dvander@1203
  3977
**
dvander@1203
  3978
** If the P1 index entry is less than  the top of the stack
dvander@1203
  3979
** then jump to P2.  Otherwise fall through to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  3980
** In either case, the stack is popped once.
dvander@1203
  3981
**
dvander@1203
  3982
** If P3 is the "+" string (or any other non-NULL string) then the
dvander@1203
  3983
** index taken from the top of the stack is temporarily increased by
dvander@1203
  3984
** an epsilon prior to the comparison.  This makes the opcode work
dvander@1203
  3985
** like IdxLE.
dvander@1203
  3986
*/
dvander@1203
  3987
case OP_IdxLT:          /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3988
case OP_IdxGT:          /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3989
case OP_IdxGE: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  3990
  int i= pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  3991
  Cursor *pC;
dvander@1203
  3992
dvander@1203
  3993
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nCursor );
dvander@1203
  3994
  assert( p->apCsr[i]!=0 );
dvander@1203
  3995
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  3996
  if( (pC = p->apCsr[i])->pCursor!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  3997
    int res;
dvander@1203
  3998
 
dvander@1203
  3999
    assert( pTos->flags & MEM_Blob );  /* Created using OP_MakeRecord */
dvander@1203
  4000
    assert( pC->deferredMoveto==0 );
dvander@1203
  4001
    ExpandBlob(pTos);
dvander@1203
  4002
    *pC->pIncrKey = pOp->p3!=0;
dvander@1203
  4003
    assert( pOp->p3==0 || pOp->opcode!=OP_IdxGT );
dvander@1203
  4004
    rc = sqlite3VdbeIdxKeyCompare(pC, pTos->n, (u8*)pTos->z, &res);
dvander@1203
  4005
    *pC->pIncrKey = 0;
dvander@1203
  4006
    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  4007
      break;
dvander@1203
  4008
    }
dvander@1203
  4009
    if( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxLT ){
dvander@1203
  4010
      res = -res;
dvander@1203
  4011
    }else if( pOp->opcode==OP_IdxGE ){
dvander@1203
  4012
      res++;
dvander@1203
  4013
    }
dvander@1203
  4014
    if( res>0 ){
dvander@1203
  4015
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1 ;
dvander@1203
  4016
    }
dvander@1203
  4017
  }
dvander@1203
  4018
  Release(pTos);
dvander@1203
  4019
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  4020
  break;
dvander@1203
  4021
}
dvander@1203
  4022
dvander@1203
  4023
/* Opcode: Destroy P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4024
**
dvander@1203
  4025
** Delete an entire database table or index whose root page in the database
dvander@1203
  4026
** file is given by P1.
dvander@1203
  4027
**
dvander@1203
  4028
** The table being destroyed is in the main database file if P2==0.  If
dvander@1203
  4029
** P2==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file
dvander@1203
  4030
** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE.
dvander@1203
  4031
**
dvander@1203
  4032
** If AUTOVACUUM is enabled then it is possible that another root page
dvander@1203
  4033
** might be moved into the newly deleted root page in order to keep all
dvander@1203
  4034
** root pages contiguous at the beginning of the database.  The former
dvander@1203
  4035
** value of the root page that moved - its value before the move occurred -
dvander@1203
  4036
** is pushed onto the stack.  If no page movement was required (because
dvander@1203
  4037
** the table being dropped was already the last one in the database) then
dvander@1203
  4038
** a zero is pushed onto the stack.  If AUTOVACUUM is disabled
dvander@1203
  4039
** then a zero is pushed onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  4040
**
dvander@1203
  4041
** See also: Clear
dvander@1203
  4042
*/
dvander@1203
  4043
case OP_Destroy: {
dvander@1203
  4044
  int iMoved;
dvander@1203
  4045
  int iCnt;
dvander@1203
  4046
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4047
  Vdbe *pVdbe;
dvander@1203
  4048
  iCnt = 0;
dvander@1203
  4049
  for(pVdbe=db->pVdbe; pVdbe; pVdbe=pVdbe->pNext){
dvander@1203
  4050
    if( pVdbe->magic==VDBE_MAGIC_RUN && pVdbe->inVtabMethod<2 && pVdbe->pc>=0 ){
dvander@1203
  4051
      iCnt++;
dvander@1203
  4052
    }
dvander@1203
  4053
  }
dvander@1203
  4054
#else
dvander@1203
  4055
  iCnt = db->activeVdbeCnt;
dvander@1203
  4056
#endif
dvander@1203
  4057
  if( iCnt>1 ){
dvander@1203
  4058
    rc = SQLITE_LOCKED;
dvander@1203
  4059
  }else{
dvander@1203
  4060
    assert( iCnt==1 );
dvander@1203
  4061
    rc = sqlite3BtreeDropTable(db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt, pOp->p1, &iMoved);
dvander@1203
  4062
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  4063
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  4064
    pTos->u.i = iMoved;
dvander@1203
  4065
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM
dvander@1203
  4066
    if( rc==SQLITE_OK && iMoved!=0 ){
dvander@1203
  4067
      sqlite3RootPageMoved(&db->aDb[pOp->p2], iMoved, pOp->p1);
dvander@1203
  4068
    }
dvander@1203
  4069
#endif
dvander@1203
  4070
  }
dvander@1203
  4071
  break;
dvander@1203
  4072
}
dvander@1203
  4073
dvander@1203
  4074
/* Opcode: Clear P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4075
**
dvander@1203
  4076
** Delete all contents of the database table or index whose root page
dvander@1203
  4077
** in the database file is given by P1.  But, unlike Destroy, do not
dvander@1203
  4078
** remove the table or index from the database file.
dvander@1203
  4079
**
dvander@1203
  4080
** The table being clear is in the main database file if P2==0.  If
dvander@1203
  4081
** P2==1 then the table to be clear is in the auxiliary database file
dvander@1203
  4082
** that is used to store tables create using CREATE TEMPORARY TABLE.
dvander@1203
  4083
**
dvander@1203
  4084
** See also: Destroy
dvander@1203
  4085
*/
dvander@1203
  4086
case OP_Clear: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4087
dvander@1203
  4088
  /* For consistency with the way other features of SQLite operate
dvander@1203
  4089
  ** with a truncate, we will also skip the update callback.
dvander@1203
  4090
  */
dvander@1203
  4091
#if 0
dvander@1203
  4092
  Btree *pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt;
dvander@1203
  4093
  if( db->xUpdateCallback && pOp->p3 ){
dvander@1203
  4094
    const char *zDb = db->aDb[pOp->p2].zName;
dvander@1203
  4095
    const char *zTbl = pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  4096
    BtCursor *pCur = 0;
dvander@1203
  4097
    int fin = 0;
dvander@1203
  4098
dvander@1203
  4099
    rc = sqlite3BtreeCursor(pBt, pOp->p1, 0, 0, 0, &pCur);
dvander@1203
  4100
    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  4101
      goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  4102
    }
dvander@1203
  4103
    for(
dvander@1203
  4104
      rc=sqlite3BtreeFirst(pCur, &fin); 
dvander@1203
  4105
      rc==SQLITE_OK && !fin; 
dvander@1203
  4106
      rc=sqlite3BtreeNext(pCur, &fin)
dvander@1203
  4107
    ){
dvander@1203
  4108
      i64 iKey;
dvander@1203
  4109
      rc = sqlite3BtreeKeySize(pCur, &iKey);
dvander@1203
  4110
      if( rc ){
dvander@1203
  4111
        break;
dvander@1203
  4112
      }
dvander@1203
  4113
      iKey = keyToInt(iKey);
dvander@1203
  4114
      db->xUpdateCallback(db->pUpdateArg, SQLITE_DELETE, zDb, zTbl, iKey);
dvander@1203
  4115
    }
dvander@1203
  4116
    sqlite3BtreeCloseCursor(pCur);
dvander@1203
  4117
    if( rc!=SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  4118
      goto abort_due_to_error;
dvander@1203
  4119
    }
dvander@1203
  4120
  }
dvander@1203
  4121
#endif
dvander@1203
  4122
  rc = sqlite3BtreeClearTable(db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt, pOp->p1);
dvander@1203
  4123
  break;
dvander@1203
  4124
}
dvander@1203
  4125
dvander@1203
  4126
/* Opcode: CreateTable P1 * *
dvander@1203
  4127
**
dvander@1203
  4128
** Allocate a new table in the main database file if P2==0 or in the
dvander@1203
  4129
** auxiliary database file if P2==1.  Push the page number
dvander@1203
  4130
** for the root page of the new table onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  4131
**
dvander@1203
  4132
** The difference between a table and an index is this:  A table must
dvander@1203
  4133
** have a 4-byte integer key and can have arbitrary data.  An index
dvander@1203
  4134
** has an arbitrary key but no data.
dvander@1203
  4135
**
dvander@1203
  4136
** See also: CreateIndex
dvander@1203
  4137
*/
dvander@1203
  4138
/* Opcode: CreateIndex P1 * *
dvander@1203
  4139
**
dvander@1203
  4140
** Allocate a new index in the main database file if P2==0 or in the
dvander@1203
  4141
** auxiliary database file if P2==1.  Push the page number of the
dvander@1203
  4142
** root page of the new index onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  4143
**
dvander@1203
  4144
** See documentation on OP_CreateTable for additional information.
dvander@1203
  4145
*/
dvander@1203
  4146
case OP_CreateIndex:
dvander@1203
  4147
case OP_CreateTable: {
dvander@1203
  4148
  int pgno;
dvander@1203
  4149
  int flags;
dvander@1203
  4150
  Db *pDb;
dvander@1203
  4151
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  4152
  pDb = &db->aDb[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  4153
  assert( pDb->pBt!=0 );
dvander@1203
  4154
  if( pOp->opcode==OP_CreateTable ){
dvander@1203
  4155
    /* flags = BTREE_INTKEY; */
dvander@1203
  4156
    flags = BTREE_LEAFDATA|BTREE_INTKEY;
dvander@1203
  4157
  }else{
dvander@1203
  4158
    flags = BTREE_ZERODATA;
dvander@1203
  4159
  }
dvander@1203
  4160
  rc = sqlite3BtreeCreateTable(pDb->pBt, &pgno, flags);
dvander@1203
  4161
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  4162
  if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  4163
    pTos->u.i = pgno;
dvander@1203
  4164
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  4165
  }else{
dvander@1203
  4166
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  4167
  }
dvander@1203
  4168
  break;
dvander@1203
  4169
}
dvander@1203
  4170
dvander@1203
  4171
/* Opcode: ParseSchema P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  4172
**
dvander@1203
  4173
** Read and parse all entries from the SQLITE_MASTER table of database P1
dvander@1203
  4174
** that match the WHERE clause P3.  P2 is the "force" flag.   Always do
dvander@1203
  4175
** the parsing if P2 is true.  If P2 is false, then this routine is a
dvander@1203
  4176
** no-op if the schema is not currently loaded.  In other words, if P2
dvander@1203
  4177
** is false, the SQLITE_MASTER table is only parsed if the rest of the
dvander@1203
  4178
** schema is already loaded into the symbol table.
dvander@1203
  4179
**
dvander@1203
  4180
** This opcode invokes the parser to create a new virtual machine,
dvander@1203
  4181
** then runs the new virtual machine.  It is thus a reentrant opcode.
dvander@1203
  4182
*/
dvander@1203
  4183
case OP_ParseSchema: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4184
  char *zSql;
dvander@1203
  4185
  int iDb = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4186
  const char *zMaster;
dvander@1203
  4187
  InitData initData;
dvander@1203
  4188
dvander@1203
  4189
  assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  4190
  if( !pOp->p2 && !DbHasProperty(db, iDb, DB_SchemaLoaded) ){
dvander@1203
  4191
    break;
dvander@1203
  4192
  }
dvander@1203
  4193
  zMaster = SCHEMA_TABLE(iDb);
dvander@1203
  4194
  initData.db = db;
dvander@1203
  4195
  initData.iDb = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4196
  initData.pzErrMsg = &p->zErrMsg;
dvander@1203
  4197
  zSql = sqlite3MPrintf(
dvander@1203
  4198
     "SELECT name, rootpage, sql FROM '%q'.%s WHERE %s",
dvander@1203
  4199
     db->aDb[iDb].zName, zMaster, pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  4200
  if( zSql==0 ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  4201
  sqlite3SafetyOff(db);
dvander@1203
  4202
  assert( db->init.busy==0 );
dvander@1203
  4203
  db->init.busy = 1;
dvander@1203
  4204
  assert( !sqlite3MallocFailed() );
dvander@1203
  4205
  rc = sqlite3_exec(db, zSql, sqlite3InitCallback, &initData, 0);
dvander@1203
  4206
  if( rc==SQLITE_ABORT ) rc = initData.rc;
dvander@1203
  4207
  sqliteFree(zSql);
dvander@1203
  4208
  db->init.busy = 0;
dvander@1203
  4209
  sqlite3SafetyOn(db);
dvander@1203
  4210
  if( rc==SQLITE_NOMEM ){
dvander@1203
  4211
    sqlite3FailedMalloc();
dvander@1203
  4212
    goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  4213
  }
dvander@1203
  4214
  break;  
dvander@1203
  4215
}
dvander@1203
  4216
dvander@1203
  4217
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PARSER)
dvander@1203
  4218
/* Opcode: LoadAnalysis P1 * *
dvander@1203
  4219
**
dvander@1203
  4220
** Read the sqlite_stat1 table for database P1 and load the content
dvander@1203
  4221
** of that table into the internal index hash table.  This will cause
dvander@1203
  4222
** the analysis to be used when preparing all subsequent queries.
dvander@1203
  4223
*/
dvander@1203
  4224
case OP_LoadAnalysis: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4225
  int iDb = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4226
  assert( iDb>=0 && iDb<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  4227
  rc = sqlite3AnalysisLoad(db, iDb);
dvander@1203
  4228
  break;  
dvander@1203
  4229
}
dvander@1203
  4230
#endif /* !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ANALYZE) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_PARSER)  */
dvander@1203
  4231
dvander@1203
  4232
/* Opcode: DropTable P1 * P3
dvander@1203
  4233
**
dvander@1203
  4234
** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
dvander@1203
  4235
** the table named P3 in database P1.  This is called after a table
dvander@1203
  4236
** is dropped in order to keep the internal representation of the
dvander@1203
  4237
** schema consistent with what is on disk.
dvander@1203
  4238
*/
dvander@1203
  4239
case OP_DropTable: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4240
  sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTable(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  4241
  break;
dvander@1203
  4242
}
dvander@1203
  4243
dvander@1203
  4244
/* Opcode: DropIndex P1 * P3
dvander@1203
  4245
**
dvander@1203
  4246
** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
dvander@1203
  4247
** the index named P3 in database P1.  This is called after an index
dvander@1203
  4248
** is dropped in order to keep the internal representation of the
dvander@1203
  4249
** schema consistent with what is on disk.
dvander@1203
  4250
*/
dvander@1203
  4251
case OP_DropIndex: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4252
  sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteIndex(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  4253
  break;
dvander@1203
  4254
}
dvander@1203
  4255
dvander@1203
  4256
/* Opcode: DropTrigger P1 * P3
dvander@1203
  4257
**
dvander@1203
  4258
** Remove the internal (in-memory) data structures that describe
dvander@1203
  4259
** the trigger named P3 in database P1.  This is called after a trigger
dvander@1203
  4260
** is dropped in order to keep the internal representation of the
dvander@1203
  4261
** schema consistent with what is on disk.
dvander@1203
  4262
*/
dvander@1203
  4263
case OP_DropTrigger: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4264
  sqlite3UnlinkAndDeleteTrigger(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  4265
  break;
dvander@1203
  4266
}
dvander@1203
  4267
dvander@1203
  4268
dvander@1203
  4269
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK
dvander@1203
  4270
/* Opcode: IntegrityCk P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4271
**
dvander@1203
  4272
** Do an analysis of the currently open database.  Push onto the
dvander@1203
  4273
** stack the text of an error message describing any problems.
dvander@1203
  4274
** If no problems are found, push a NULL onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  4275
**
dvander@1203
  4276
** P1 is the address of a memory cell that contains the maximum
dvander@1203
  4277
** number of allowed errors.  At most mem[P1] errors will be reported.
dvander@1203
  4278
** In other words, the analysis stops as soon as mem[P1] errors are 
dvander@1203
  4279
** seen.  Mem[P1] is updated with the number of errors remaining.
dvander@1203
  4280
**
dvander@1203
  4281
** The root page numbers of all tables in the database are integer
dvander@1203
  4282
** values on the stack.  This opcode pulls as many integers as it
dvander@1203
  4283
** can off of the stack and uses those numbers as the root pages.
dvander@1203
  4284
**
dvander@1203
  4285
** If P2 is not zero, the check is done on the auxiliary database
dvander@1203
  4286
** file, not the main database file.
dvander@1203
  4287
**
dvander@1203
  4288
** This opcode is used to implement the integrity_check pragma.
dvander@1203
  4289
*/
dvander@1203
  4290
case OP_IntegrityCk: {
dvander@1203
  4291
  int nRoot;
dvander@1203
  4292
  int *aRoot;
dvander@1203
  4293
  int j;
dvander@1203
  4294
  int nErr;
dvander@1203
  4295
  char *z;
dvander@1203
  4296
  Mem *pnErr;
dvander@1203
  4297
dvander@1203
  4298
  for(nRoot=0; &pTos[-nRoot]>=p->aStack; nRoot++){
dvander@1203
  4299
    if( (pTos[-nRoot].flags & MEM_Int)==0 ) break;
dvander@1203
  4300
  }
dvander@1203
  4301
  assert( nRoot>0 );
dvander@1203
  4302
  aRoot = sqliteMallocRaw( sizeof(int*)*(nRoot+1) );
dvander@1203
  4303
  if( aRoot==0 ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  4304
  j = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4305
  assert( j>=0 && j<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4306
  pnErr = &p->aMem[j];
dvander@1203
  4307
  assert( (pnErr->flags & MEM_Int)!=0 );
dvander@1203
  4308
  for(j=0; j<nRoot; j++){
dvander@1203
  4309
    aRoot[j] = pTos[-j].u.i;
dvander@1203
  4310
  }
dvander@1203
  4311
  aRoot[j] = 0;
dvander@1203
  4312
  popStack(&pTos, nRoot);
dvander@1203
  4313
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  4314
  z = sqlite3BtreeIntegrityCheck(db->aDb[pOp->p2].pBt, aRoot, nRoot,
dvander@1203
  4315
                                 pnErr->u.i, &nErr);
dvander@1203
  4316
  pnErr->u.i -= nErr;
dvander@1203
  4317
  if( nErr==0 ){
dvander@1203
  4318
    assert( z==0 );
dvander@1203
  4319
    pTos->flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  4320
  }else{
dvander@1203
  4321
    pTos->z = z;
dvander@1203
  4322
    pTos->n = strlen(z);
dvander@1203
  4323
    pTos->flags = MEM_Str | MEM_Dyn | MEM_Term;
dvander@1203
  4324
    pTos->xDel = 0;
dvander@1203
  4325
  }
dvander@1203
  4326
  pTos->enc = SQLITE_UTF8;
dvander@1203
  4327
  sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(pTos, encoding);
dvander@1203
  4328
  sqliteFree(aRoot);
dvander@1203
  4329
  break;
dvander@1203
  4330
}
dvander@1203
  4331
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_INTEGRITY_CHECK */
dvander@1203
  4332
dvander@1203
  4333
/* Opcode: FifoWrite * * *
dvander@1203
  4334
**
dvander@1203
  4335
** Write the integer on the top of the stack
dvander@1203
  4336
** into the Fifo.
dvander@1203
  4337
*/
dvander@1203
  4338
case OP_FifoWrite: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4339
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  4340
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  4341
  sqlite3VdbeFifoPush(&p->sFifo, pTos->u.i);
dvander@1203
  4342
  assert( (pTos->flags & MEM_Dyn)==0 );
dvander@1203
  4343
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  4344
  break;
dvander@1203
  4345
}
dvander@1203
  4346
dvander@1203
  4347
/* Opcode: FifoRead * P2 *
dvander@1203
  4348
**
dvander@1203
  4349
** Attempt to read a single integer from the Fifo
dvander@1203
  4350
** and push it onto the stack.  If the Fifo is empty
dvander@1203
  4351
** push nothing but instead jump to P2.
dvander@1203
  4352
*/
dvander@1203
  4353
case OP_FifoRead: {
dvander@1203
  4354
  i64 v;
dvander@1203
  4355
  CHECK_FOR_INTERRUPT;
dvander@1203
  4356
  if( sqlite3VdbeFifoPop(&p->sFifo, &v)==SQLITE_DONE ){
dvander@1203
  4357
    pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  4358
  }else{
dvander@1203
  4359
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  4360
    pTos->u.i = v;
dvander@1203
  4361
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  4362
  }
dvander@1203
  4363
  break;
dvander@1203
  4364
}
dvander@1203
  4365
dvander@1203
  4366
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER
dvander@1203
  4367
/* Opcode: ContextPush * * * 
dvander@1203
  4368
**
dvander@1203
  4369
** Save the current Vdbe context such that it can be restored by a ContextPop
dvander@1203
  4370
** opcode. The context stores the last insert row id, the last statement change
dvander@1203
  4371
** count, and the current statement change count.
dvander@1203
  4372
*/
dvander@1203
  4373
case OP_ContextPush: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4374
  int i = p->contextStackTop++;
dvander@1203
  4375
  Context *pContext;
dvander@1203
  4376
dvander@1203
  4377
  assert( i>=0 );
dvander@1203
  4378
  /* FIX ME: This should be allocated as part of the vdbe at compile-time */
dvander@1203
  4379
  if( i>=p->contextStackDepth ){
dvander@1203
  4380
    p->contextStackDepth = i+1;
dvander@1203
  4381
    p->contextStack = sqliteReallocOrFree(p->contextStack,
dvander@1203
  4382
                                          sizeof(Context)*(i+1));
dvander@1203
  4383
    if( p->contextStack==0 ) goto no_mem;
dvander@1203
  4384
  }
dvander@1203
  4385
  pContext = &p->contextStack[i];
dvander@1203
  4386
  pContext->lastRowid = db->lastRowid;
dvander@1203
  4387
  pContext->nChange = p->nChange;
dvander@1203
  4388
  pContext->sFifo = p->sFifo;
dvander@1203
  4389
  sqlite3VdbeFifoInit(&p->sFifo);
dvander@1203
  4390
  break;
dvander@1203
  4391
}
dvander@1203
  4392
dvander@1203
  4393
/* Opcode: ContextPop * * * 
dvander@1203
  4394
**
dvander@1203
  4395
** Restore the Vdbe context to the state it was in when contextPush was last
dvander@1203
  4396
** executed. The context stores the last insert row id, the last statement
dvander@1203
  4397
** change count, and the current statement change count.
dvander@1203
  4398
*/
dvander@1203
  4399
case OP_ContextPop: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4400
  Context *pContext = &p->contextStack[--p->contextStackTop];
dvander@1203
  4401
  assert( p->contextStackTop>=0 );
dvander@1203
  4402
  db->lastRowid = pContext->lastRowid;
dvander@1203
  4403
  p->nChange = pContext->nChange;
dvander@1203
  4404
  sqlite3VdbeFifoClear(&p->sFifo);
dvander@1203
  4405
  p->sFifo = pContext->sFifo;
dvander@1203
  4406
  break;
dvander@1203
  4407
}
dvander@1203
  4408
#endif /* #ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_TRIGGER */
dvander@1203
  4409
dvander@1203
  4410
/* Opcode: MemStore P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4411
**
dvander@1203
  4412
** Write the top of the stack into memory location P1.
dvander@1203
  4413
** P1 should be a small integer since space is allocated
dvander@1203
  4414
** for all memory locations between 0 and P1 inclusive.
dvander@1203
  4415
**
dvander@1203
  4416
** After the data is stored in the memory location, the
dvander@1203
  4417
** stack is popped once if P2 is 1.  If P2 is zero, then
dvander@1203
  4418
** the original data remains on the stack.
dvander@1203
  4419
*/
dvander@1203
  4420
case OP_MemStore: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4421
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  4422
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4423
  rc = sqlite3VdbeMemMove(&p->aMem[pOp->p1], pTos);
dvander@1203
  4424
  pTos--;
dvander@1203
  4425
dvander@1203
  4426
  /* If P2 is 0 then fall thru to the next opcode, OP_MemLoad, that will
dvander@1203
  4427
  ** restore the top of the stack to its original value.
dvander@1203
  4428
  */
dvander@1203
  4429
  if( pOp->p2 ){
dvander@1203
  4430
    break;
dvander@1203
  4431
  }
dvander@1203
  4432
}
dvander@1203
  4433
/* Opcode: MemLoad P1 * *
dvander@1203
  4434
**
dvander@1203
  4435
** Push a copy of the value in memory location P1 onto the stack.
dvander@1203
  4436
**
dvander@1203
  4437
** If the value is a string, then the value pushed is a pointer to
dvander@1203
  4438
** the string that is stored in the memory location.  If the memory
dvander@1203
  4439
** location is subsequently changed (using OP_MemStore) then the
dvander@1203
  4440
** value pushed onto the stack will change too.
dvander@1203
  4441
*/
dvander@1203
  4442
case OP_MemLoad: {
dvander@1203
  4443
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4444
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4445
  pTos++;
dvander@1203
  4446
  sqlite3VdbeMemShallowCopy(pTos, &p->aMem[i], MEM_Ephem);
dvander@1203
  4447
  break;
dvander@1203
  4448
}
dvander@1203
  4449
dvander@1203
  4450
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT
dvander@1203
  4451
/* Opcode: MemMax P1 * *
dvander@1203
  4452
**
dvander@1203
  4453
** Set the value of memory cell P1 to the maximum of its current value
dvander@1203
  4454
** and the value on the top of the stack.  The stack is unchanged.
dvander@1203
  4455
**
dvander@1203
  4456
** This instruction throws an error if the memory cell is not initially
dvander@1203
  4457
** an integer.
dvander@1203
  4458
*/
dvander@1203
  4459
case OP_MemMax: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4460
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4461
  Mem *pMem;
dvander@1203
  4462
  assert( pTos>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  4463
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4464
  pMem = &p->aMem[i];
dvander@1203
  4465
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pMem);
dvander@1203
  4466
  sqlite3VdbeMemIntegerify(pTos);
dvander@1203
  4467
  if( pMem->u.i<pTos->u.i){
dvander@1203
  4468
    pMem->u.i = pTos->u.i;
dvander@1203
  4469
  }
dvander@1203
  4470
  break;
dvander@1203
  4471
}
dvander@1203
  4472
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOINCREMENT */
dvander@1203
  4473
dvander@1203
  4474
/* Opcode: MemIncr P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4475
**
dvander@1203
  4476
** Increment the integer valued memory cell P2 by the value in P1.
dvander@1203
  4477
**
dvander@1203
  4478
** It is illegal to use this instruction on a memory cell that does
dvander@1203
  4479
** not contain an integer.  An assertion fault will result if you try.
dvander@1203
  4480
*/
dvander@1203
  4481
case OP_MemIncr: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4482
  int i = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  4483
  Mem *pMem;
dvander@1203
  4484
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4485
  pMem = &p->aMem[i];
dvander@1203
  4486
  assert( pMem->flags==MEM_Int );
dvander@1203
  4487
  pMem->u.i += pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4488
  break;
dvander@1203
  4489
}
dvander@1203
  4490
dvander@1203
  4491
/* Opcode: IfMemPos P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4492
**
dvander@1203
  4493
** If the value of memory cell P1 is 1 or greater, jump to P2.
dvander@1203
  4494
**
dvander@1203
  4495
** It is illegal to use this instruction on a memory cell that does
dvander@1203
  4496
** not contain an integer.  An assertion fault will result if you try.
dvander@1203
  4497
*/
dvander@1203
  4498
case OP_IfMemPos: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4499
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4500
  Mem *pMem;
dvander@1203
  4501
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4502
  pMem = &p->aMem[i];
dvander@1203
  4503
  assert( pMem->flags==MEM_Int );
dvander@1203
  4504
  if( pMem->u.i>0 ){
dvander@1203
  4505
     pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  4506
  }
dvander@1203
  4507
  break;
dvander@1203
  4508
}
dvander@1203
  4509
dvander@1203
  4510
/* Opcode: IfMemNeg P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4511
**
dvander@1203
  4512
** If the value of memory cell P1 is less than zero, jump to P2. 
dvander@1203
  4513
**
dvander@1203
  4514
** It is illegal to use this instruction on a memory cell that does
dvander@1203
  4515
** not contain an integer.  An assertion fault will result if you try.
dvander@1203
  4516
*/
dvander@1203
  4517
case OP_IfMemNeg: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4518
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4519
  Mem *pMem;
dvander@1203
  4520
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4521
  pMem = &p->aMem[i];
dvander@1203
  4522
  assert( pMem->flags==MEM_Int );
dvander@1203
  4523
  if( pMem->u.i<0 ){
dvander@1203
  4524
     pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  4525
  }
dvander@1203
  4526
  break;
dvander@1203
  4527
}
dvander@1203
  4528
dvander@1203
  4529
/* Opcode: IfMemZero P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4530
**
dvander@1203
  4531
** If the value of memory cell P1 is exactly 0, jump to P2. 
dvander@1203
  4532
**
dvander@1203
  4533
** It is illegal to use this instruction on a memory cell that does
dvander@1203
  4534
** not contain an integer.  An assertion fault will result if you try.
dvander@1203
  4535
*/
dvander@1203
  4536
case OP_IfMemZero: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4537
  int i = pOp->p1;
dvander@1203
  4538
  Mem *pMem;
dvander@1203
  4539
  assert( i>=0 && i<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4540
  pMem = &p->aMem[i];
dvander@1203
  4541
  assert( pMem->flags==MEM_Int );
dvander@1203
  4542
  if( pMem->u.i==0 ){
dvander@1203
  4543
     pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  4544
  }
dvander@1203
  4545
  break;
dvander@1203
  4546
}
dvander@1203
  4547
dvander@1203
  4548
/* Opcode: MemNull P1 * *
dvander@1203
  4549
**
dvander@1203
  4550
** Store a NULL in memory cell P1
dvander@1203
  4551
*/
dvander@1203
  4552
case OP_MemNull: {
dvander@1203
  4553
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4554
  sqlite3VdbeMemSetNull(&p->aMem[pOp->p1]);
dvander@1203
  4555
  break;
dvander@1203
  4556
}
dvander@1203
  4557
dvander@1203
  4558
/* Opcode: MemInt P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4559
**
dvander@1203
  4560
** Store the integer value P1 in memory cell P2.
dvander@1203
  4561
*/
dvander@1203
  4562
case OP_MemInt: {
dvander@1203
  4563
  assert( pOp->p2>=0 && pOp->p2<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4564
  sqlite3VdbeMemSetInt64(&p->aMem[pOp->p2], pOp->p1);
dvander@1203
  4565
  break;
dvander@1203
  4566
}
dvander@1203
  4567
dvander@1203
  4568
/* Opcode: MemMove P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4569
**
dvander@1203
  4570
** Move the content of memory cell P2 over to memory cell P1.
dvander@1203
  4571
** Any prior content of P1 is erased.  Memory cell P2 is left
dvander@1203
  4572
** containing a NULL.
dvander@1203
  4573
*/
dvander@1203
  4574
case OP_MemMove: {
dvander@1203
  4575
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4576
  assert( pOp->p2>=0 && pOp->p2<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4577
  rc = sqlite3VdbeMemMove(&p->aMem[pOp->p1], &p->aMem[pOp->p2]);
dvander@1203
  4578
  break;
dvander@1203
  4579
}
dvander@1203
  4580
dvander@1203
  4581
/* Opcode: AggStep P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  4582
**
dvander@1203
  4583
** Execute the step function for an aggregate.  The
dvander@1203
  4584
** function has P2 arguments.  P3 is a pointer to the FuncDef
dvander@1203
  4585
** structure that specifies the function.  Use memory location
dvander@1203
  4586
** P1 as the accumulator.
dvander@1203
  4587
**
dvander@1203
  4588
** The P2 arguments are popped from the stack.
dvander@1203
  4589
*/
dvander@1203
  4590
case OP_AggStep: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4591
  int n = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  4592
  int i;
dvander@1203
  4593
  Mem *pMem, *pRec;
dvander@1203
  4594
  sqlite3_context ctx;
dvander@1203
  4595
  sqlite3_value **apVal;
dvander@1203
  4596
dvander@1203
  4597
  assert( n>=0 );
dvander@1203
  4598
  pRec = &pTos[1-n];
dvander@1203
  4599
  assert( pRec>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  4600
  apVal = p->apArg;
dvander@1203
  4601
  assert( apVal || n==0 );
dvander@1203
  4602
  for(i=0; i<n; i++, pRec++){
dvander@1203
  4603
    apVal[i] = pRec;
dvander@1203
  4604
    storeTypeInfo(pRec, encoding);
dvander@1203
  4605
  }
dvander@1203
  4606
  ctx.pFunc = (FuncDef*)pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  4607
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4608
  ctx.pMem = pMem = &p->aMem[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  4609
  pMem->n++;
dvander@1203
  4610
  ctx.s.flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  4611
  ctx.s.z = 0;
dvander@1203
  4612
  ctx.s.xDel = 0;
dvander@1203
  4613
  ctx.isError = 0;
dvander@1203
  4614
  ctx.pColl = 0;
dvander@1203
  4615
  if( ctx.pFunc->needCollSeq ){
dvander@1203
  4616
    assert( pOp>p->aOp );
dvander@1203
  4617
    assert( pOp[-1].p3type==P3_COLLSEQ );
dvander@1203
  4618
    assert( pOp[-1].opcode==OP_CollSeq );
dvander@1203
  4619
    ctx.pColl = (CollSeq *)pOp[-1].p3;
dvander@1203
  4620
  }
dvander@1203
  4621
  (ctx.pFunc->xStep)(&ctx, n, apVal);
dvander@1203
  4622
  popStack(&pTos, n);
dvander@1203
  4623
  if( ctx.isError ){
dvander@1203
  4624
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, sqlite3_value_text(&ctx.s), (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  4625
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  4626
  }
dvander@1203
  4627
  sqlite3VdbeMemRelease(&ctx.s);
dvander@1203
  4628
  break;
dvander@1203
  4629
}
dvander@1203
  4630
dvander@1203
  4631
/* Opcode: AggFinal P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  4632
**
dvander@1203
  4633
** Execute the finalizer function for an aggregate.  P1 is
dvander@1203
  4634
** the memory location that is the accumulator for the aggregate.
dvander@1203
  4635
**
dvander@1203
  4636
** P2 is the number of arguments that the step function takes and
dvander@1203
  4637
** P3 is a pointer to the FuncDef for this function.  The P2
dvander@1203
  4638
** argument is not used by this opcode.  It is only there to disambiguate
dvander@1203
  4639
** functions that can take varying numbers of arguments.  The
dvander@1203
  4640
** P3 argument is only needed for the degenerate case where
dvander@1203
  4641
** the step function was not previously called.
dvander@1203
  4642
*/
dvander@1203
  4643
case OP_AggFinal: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4644
  Mem *pMem;
dvander@1203
  4645
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<p->nMem );
dvander@1203
  4646
  pMem = &p->aMem[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  4647
  assert( (pMem->flags & ~(MEM_Null|MEM_Agg))==0 );
dvander@1203
  4648
  rc = sqlite3VdbeMemFinalize(pMem, (FuncDef*)pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  4649
  if( rc==SQLITE_ERROR ){
dvander@1203
  4650
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, sqlite3_value_text(pMem), (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  4651
  }
dvander@1203
  4652
  if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pMem) ){
dvander@1203
  4653
    goto too_big;
dvander@1203
  4654
  }
dvander@1203
  4655
  break;
dvander@1203
  4656
}
dvander@1203
  4657
dvander@1203
  4658
dvander@1203
  4659
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_VACUUM) && !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_ATTACH)
dvander@1203
  4660
/* Opcode: Vacuum * * *
dvander@1203
  4661
**
dvander@1203
  4662
** Vacuum the entire database.  This opcode will cause other virtual
dvander@1203
  4663
** machines to be created and run.  It may not be called from within
dvander@1203
  4664
** a transaction.
dvander@1203
  4665
*/
dvander@1203
  4666
case OP_Vacuum: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4667
  if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse; 
dvander@1203
  4668
  rc = sqlite3RunVacuum(&p->zErrMsg, db);
dvander@1203
  4669
  if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4670
  break;
dvander@1203
  4671
}
dvander@1203
  4672
#endif
dvander@1203
  4673
dvander@1203
  4674
#if !defined(SQLITE_OMIT_AUTOVACUUM)
dvander@1203
  4675
/* Opcode: IncrVacuum P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4676
**
dvander@1203
  4677
** Perform a single step of the incremental vacuum procedure on
dvander@1203
  4678
** the P1 database. If the vacuum has finished, jump to instruction
dvander@1203
  4679
** P2. Otherwise, fall through to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  4680
*/
dvander@1203
  4681
case OP_IncrVacuum: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4682
  Btree *pBt;
dvander@1203
  4683
dvander@1203
  4684
  assert( pOp->p1>=0 && pOp->p1<db->nDb );
dvander@1203
  4685
  pBt = db->aDb[pOp->p1].pBt;
dvander@1203
  4686
  rc = sqlite3BtreeIncrVacuum(pBt);
dvander@1203
  4687
  if( rc==SQLITE_DONE ){
dvander@1203
  4688
    pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  4689
    rc = SQLITE_OK;
dvander@1203
  4690
  }
dvander@1203
  4691
  break;
dvander@1203
  4692
}
dvander@1203
  4693
#endif
dvander@1203
  4694
dvander@1203
  4695
/* Opcode: Expire P1 * *
dvander@1203
  4696
**
dvander@1203
  4697
** Cause precompiled statements to become expired. An expired statement
dvander@1203
  4698
** fails with an error code of SQLITE_SCHEMA if it is ever executed 
dvander@1203
  4699
** (via sqlite3_step()).
dvander@1203
  4700
** 
dvander@1203
  4701
** If P1 is 0, then all SQL statements become expired. If P1 is non-zero,
dvander@1203
  4702
** then only the currently executing statement is affected. 
dvander@1203
  4703
*/
dvander@1203
  4704
case OP_Expire: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4705
  if( !pOp->p1 ){
dvander@1203
  4706
    sqlite3ExpirePreparedStatements(db);
dvander@1203
  4707
  }else{
dvander@1203
  4708
    p->expired = 1;
dvander@1203
  4709
  }
dvander@1203
  4710
  break;
dvander@1203
  4711
}
dvander@1203
  4712
dvander@1203
  4713
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE
dvander@1203
  4714
/* Opcode: TableLock P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  4715
**
dvander@1203
  4716
** Obtain a lock on a particular table. This instruction is only used when
dvander@1203
  4717
** the shared-cache feature is enabled. 
dvander@1203
  4718
**
dvander@1203
  4719
** If P1 is not negative, then it is the index of the database
dvander@1203
  4720
** in sqlite3.aDb[] and a read-lock is required. If P1 is negative, a 
dvander@1203
  4721
** write-lock is required. In this case the index of the database is the 
dvander@1203
  4722
** absolute value of P1 minus one (iDb = abs(P1) - 1;) and a write-lock is
dvander@1203
  4723
** required. 
dvander@1203
  4724
**
dvander@1203
  4725
** P2 contains the root-page of the table to lock.
dvander@1203
  4726
**
dvander@1203
  4727
** P3 contains a pointer to the name of the table being locked. This is only
dvander@1203
  4728
** used to generate an error message if the lock cannot be obtained.
dvander@1203
  4729
*/
dvander@1203
  4730
case OP_TableLock: {        /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4731
  int p1 = pOp->p1; 
dvander@1203
  4732
  u8 isWriteLock = (p1<0);
dvander@1203
  4733
  if( isWriteLock ){
dvander@1203
  4734
    p1 = (-1*p1)-1;
dvander@1203
  4735
  }
dvander@1203
  4736
  rc = sqlite3BtreeLockTable(db->aDb[p1].pBt, pOp->p2, isWriteLock);
dvander@1203
  4737
  if( rc==SQLITE_LOCKED ){
dvander@1203
  4738
    const char *z = (const char *)pOp->p3;
dvander@1203
  4739
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "database table is locked: ", z, (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  4740
  }
dvander@1203
  4741
  break;
dvander@1203
  4742
}
dvander@1203
  4743
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_SHARED_CACHE */
dvander@1203
  4744
dvander@1203
  4745
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4746
/* Opcode: VBegin * * P3
dvander@1203
  4747
**
dvander@1203
  4748
** P3 a pointer to an sqlite3_vtab structure. Call the xBegin method 
dvander@1203
  4749
** for that table.
dvander@1203
  4750
*/
dvander@1203
  4751
case OP_VBegin: {   /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4752
  rc = sqlite3VtabBegin(db, (sqlite3_vtab *)pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  4753
  break;
dvander@1203
  4754
}
dvander@1203
  4755
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  4756
dvander@1203
  4757
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4758
/* Opcode: VCreate P1 * P3
dvander@1203
  4759
**
dvander@1203
  4760
** P3 is the name of a virtual table in database P1. Call the xCreate method
dvander@1203
  4761
** for that table.
dvander@1203
  4762
*/
dvander@1203
  4763
case OP_VCreate: {   /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4764
  rc = sqlite3VtabCallCreate(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p3, &p->zErrMsg);
dvander@1203
  4765
  break;
dvander@1203
  4766
}
dvander@1203
  4767
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  4768
dvander@1203
  4769
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4770
/* Opcode: VDestroy P1 * P3
dvander@1203
  4771
**
dvander@1203
  4772
** P3 is the name of a virtual table in database P1.  Call the xDestroy method
dvander@1203
  4773
** of that table.
dvander@1203
  4774
*/
dvander@1203
  4775
case OP_VDestroy: {   /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4776
  p->inVtabMethod = 2;
dvander@1203
  4777
  rc = sqlite3VtabCallDestroy(db, pOp->p1, pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  4778
  p->inVtabMethod = 0;
dvander@1203
  4779
  break;
dvander@1203
  4780
}
dvander@1203
  4781
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  4782
dvander@1203
  4783
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4784
/* Opcode: VOpen P1 * P3
dvander@1203
  4785
**
dvander@1203
  4786
** P3 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
dvander@1203
  4787
** P1 is a cursor number.  This opcode opens a cursor to the virtual
dvander@1203
  4788
** table and stores that cursor in P1.
dvander@1203
  4789
*/
dvander@1203
  4790
case OP_VOpen: {   /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4791
  Cursor *pCur = 0;
dvander@1203
  4792
  sqlite3_vtab_cursor *pVtabCursor = 0;
dvander@1203
  4793
dvander@1203
  4794
  sqlite3_vtab *pVtab = (sqlite3_vtab *)(pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  4795
  sqlite3_module *pModule = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule;
dvander@1203
  4796
dvander@1203
  4797
  assert(pVtab && pModule);
dvander@1203
  4798
  if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4799
  rc = pModule->xOpen(pVtab, &pVtabCursor);
dvander@1203
  4800
  if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4801
  if( SQLITE_OK==rc ){
dvander@1203
  4802
    /* Initialise sqlite3_vtab_cursor base class */
dvander@1203
  4803
    pVtabCursor->pVtab = pVtab;
dvander@1203
  4804
dvander@1203
  4805
    /* Initialise vdbe cursor object */
dvander@1203
  4806
    pCur = allocateCursor(p, pOp->p1, -1);
dvander@1203
  4807
    if( pCur ){
dvander@1203
  4808
      pCur->pVtabCursor = pVtabCursor;
dvander@1203
  4809
      pCur->pModule = pVtabCursor->pVtab->pModule;
dvander@1203
  4810
    }else{
dvander@1203
  4811
      pModule->xClose(pVtabCursor);
dvander@1203
  4812
    }
dvander@1203
  4813
  }
dvander@1203
  4814
  break;
dvander@1203
  4815
}
dvander@1203
  4816
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  4817
dvander@1203
  4818
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4819
/* Opcode: VFilter P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  4820
**
dvander@1203
  4821
** P1 is a cursor opened using VOpen.  P2 is an address to jump to if
dvander@1203
  4822
** the filtered result set is empty.
dvander@1203
  4823
**
dvander@1203
  4824
** P3 is either NULL or a string that was generated by the xBestIndex
dvander@1203
  4825
** method of the module.  The interpretation of the P3 string is left
dvander@1203
  4826
** to the module implementation.
dvander@1203
  4827
**
dvander@1203
  4828
** This opcode invokes the xFilter method on the virtual table specified
dvander@1203
  4829
** by P1.  The integer query plan parameter to xFilter is the top of the
dvander@1203
  4830
** stack.  Next down on the stack is the argc parameter.  Beneath the
dvander@1203
  4831
** next of stack are argc additional parameters which are passed to
dvander@1203
  4832
** xFilter as argv. The topmost parameter (i.e. 3rd element popped from
dvander@1203
  4833
** the stack) becomes argv[argc-1] when passed to xFilter.
dvander@1203
  4834
**
dvander@1203
  4835
** The integer query plan parameter, argc, and all argv stack values 
dvander@1203
  4836
** are popped from the stack before this instruction completes.
dvander@1203
  4837
**
dvander@1203
  4838
** A jump is made to P2 if the result set after filtering would be 
dvander@1203
  4839
** empty.
dvander@1203
  4840
*/
dvander@1203
  4841
case OP_VFilter: {   /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4842
  int nArg;
dvander@1203
  4843
dvander@1203
  4844
  const sqlite3_module *pModule;
dvander@1203
  4845
dvander@1203
  4846
  Cursor *pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  4847
  assert( pCur->pVtabCursor );
dvander@1203
  4848
  pModule = pCur->pVtabCursor->pVtab->pModule;
dvander@1203
  4849
dvander@1203
  4850
  /* Grab the index number and argc parameters off the top of the stack. */
dvander@1203
  4851
  assert( (&pTos[-1])>=p->aStack );
dvander@1203
  4852
  assert( (pTos[0].flags&MEM_Int)!=0 && pTos[-1].flags==MEM_Int );
dvander@1203
  4853
  nArg = pTos[-1].u.i;
dvander@1203
  4854
dvander@1203
  4855
  /* Invoke the xFilter method */
dvander@1203
  4856
  {
dvander@1203
  4857
    int res = 0;
dvander@1203
  4858
    int i;
dvander@1203
  4859
    Mem **apArg = p->apArg;
dvander@1203
  4860
    for(i = 0; i<nArg; i++){
dvander@1203
  4861
      apArg[i] = &pTos[i+1-2-nArg];
dvander@1203
  4862
      storeTypeInfo(apArg[i], 0);
dvander@1203
  4863
    }
dvander@1203
  4864
dvander@1203
  4865
    if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4866
    p->inVtabMethod = 1;
dvander@1203
  4867
    rc = pModule->xFilter(pCur->pVtabCursor, pTos->u.i, pOp->p3, nArg, apArg);
dvander@1203
  4868
    p->inVtabMethod = 0;
dvander@1203
  4869
    if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  4870
      res = pModule->xEof(pCur->pVtabCursor);
dvander@1203
  4871
    }
dvander@1203
  4872
    if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4873
dvander@1203
  4874
    if( res ){
dvander@1203
  4875
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  4876
    }
dvander@1203
  4877
  }
dvander@1203
  4878
dvander@1203
  4879
  /* Pop the index number, argc value and parameters off the stack */
dvander@1203
  4880
  popStack(&pTos, 2+nArg);
dvander@1203
  4881
  break;
dvander@1203
  4882
}
dvander@1203
  4883
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  4884
dvander@1203
  4885
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4886
/* Opcode: VRowid P1 * *
dvander@1203
  4887
**
dvander@1203
  4888
** Push an integer onto the stack which is the rowid of
dvander@1203
  4889
** the virtual-table that the P1 cursor is pointing to.
dvander@1203
  4890
*/
dvander@1203
  4891
case OP_VRowid: {
dvander@1203
  4892
  const sqlite3_module *pModule;
dvander@1203
  4893
dvander@1203
  4894
  Cursor *pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  4895
  assert( pCur->pVtabCursor );
dvander@1203
  4896
  pModule = pCur->pVtabCursor->pVtab->pModule;
dvander@1203
  4897
  if( pModule->xRowid==0 ){
dvander@1203
  4898
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "Unsupported module operation: xRowid", 0);
dvander@1203
  4899
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  4900
  } else {
dvander@1203
  4901
    sqlite_int64 iRow;
dvander@1203
  4902
dvander@1203
  4903
    if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4904
    rc = pModule->xRowid(pCur->pVtabCursor, &iRow);
dvander@1203
  4905
    if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4906
dvander@1203
  4907
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  4908
    pTos->flags = MEM_Int;
dvander@1203
  4909
    pTos->u.i = iRow;
dvander@1203
  4910
  }
dvander@1203
  4911
dvander@1203
  4912
  break;
dvander@1203
  4913
}
dvander@1203
  4914
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  4915
dvander@1203
  4916
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4917
/* Opcode: VColumn P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4918
**
dvander@1203
  4919
** Push onto the stack the value of the P2-th column of
dvander@1203
  4920
** the row of the virtual-table that the P1 cursor is pointing to.
dvander@1203
  4921
*/
dvander@1203
  4922
case OP_VColumn: {
dvander@1203
  4923
  const sqlite3_module *pModule;
dvander@1203
  4924
dvander@1203
  4925
  Cursor *pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  4926
  assert( pCur->pVtabCursor );
dvander@1203
  4927
  pModule = pCur->pVtabCursor->pVtab->pModule;
dvander@1203
  4928
  if( pModule->xColumn==0 ){
dvander@1203
  4929
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "Unsupported module operation: xColumn", 0);
dvander@1203
  4930
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  4931
  } else {
dvander@1203
  4932
    sqlite3_context sContext;
dvander@1203
  4933
    memset(&sContext, 0, sizeof(sContext));
dvander@1203
  4934
    sContext.s.flags = MEM_Null;
dvander@1203
  4935
    if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4936
    rc = pModule->xColumn(pCur->pVtabCursor, &sContext, pOp->p2);
dvander@1203
  4937
dvander@1203
  4938
    /* Copy the result of the function to the top of the stack. We
dvander@1203
  4939
    ** do this regardless of whether or not an error occured to ensure any
dvander@1203
  4940
    ** dynamic allocation in sContext.s (a Mem struct) is  released.
dvander@1203
  4941
    */
dvander@1203
  4942
    sqlite3VdbeChangeEncoding(&sContext.s, encoding);
dvander@1203
  4943
    pTos++;
dvander@1203
  4944
    pTos->flags = 0;
dvander@1203
  4945
    sqlite3VdbeMemMove(pTos, &sContext.s);
dvander@1203
  4946
dvander@1203
  4947
    if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ){
dvander@1203
  4948
      goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4949
    }
dvander@1203
  4950
    if( sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pTos) ){
dvander@1203
  4951
      goto too_big;
dvander@1203
  4952
    }
dvander@1203
  4953
  }
dvander@1203
  4954
  
dvander@1203
  4955
  break;
dvander@1203
  4956
}
dvander@1203
  4957
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  4958
dvander@1203
  4959
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  4960
/* Opcode: VNext P1 P2 *
dvander@1203
  4961
**
dvander@1203
  4962
** Advance virtual table P1 to the next row in its result set and
dvander@1203
  4963
** jump to instruction P2.  Or, if the virtual table has reached
dvander@1203
  4964
** the end of its result set, then fall through to the next instruction.
dvander@1203
  4965
*/
dvander@1203
  4966
case OP_VNext: {   /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  4967
  const sqlite3_module *pModule;
dvander@1203
  4968
  int res = 0;
dvander@1203
  4969
dvander@1203
  4970
  Cursor *pCur = p->apCsr[pOp->p1];
dvander@1203
  4971
  assert( pCur->pVtabCursor );
dvander@1203
  4972
  pModule = pCur->pVtabCursor->pVtab->pModule;
dvander@1203
  4973
  if( pModule->xNext==0 ){
dvander@1203
  4974
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "Unsupported module operation: xNext", 0);
dvander@1203
  4975
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  4976
  } else {
dvander@1203
  4977
    /* Invoke the xNext() method of the module. There is no way for the
dvander@1203
  4978
    ** underlying implementation to return an error if one occurs during
dvander@1203
  4979
    ** xNext(). Instead, if an error occurs, true is returned (indicating that 
dvander@1203
  4980
    ** data is available) and the error code returned when xColumn or
dvander@1203
  4981
    ** some other method is next invoked on the save virtual table cursor.
dvander@1203
  4982
    */
dvander@1203
  4983
    if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4984
    p->inVtabMethod = 1;
dvander@1203
  4985
    rc = pModule->xNext(pCur->pVtabCursor);
dvander@1203
  4986
    p->inVtabMethod = 0;
dvander@1203
  4987
    if( rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  4988
      res = pModule->xEof(pCur->pVtabCursor);
dvander@1203
  4989
    }
dvander@1203
  4990
    if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  4991
dvander@1203
  4992
    if( !res ){
dvander@1203
  4993
      /* If there is data, jump to P2 */
dvander@1203
  4994
      pc = pOp->p2 - 1;
dvander@1203
  4995
    }
dvander@1203
  4996
  }
dvander@1203
  4997
dvander@1203
  4998
  break;
dvander@1203
  4999
}
dvander@1203
  5000
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  5001
dvander@1203
  5002
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  5003
/* Opcode: VRename * * P3
dvander@1203
  5004
**
dvander@1203
  5005
** P3 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
dvander@1203
  5006
** This opcode invokes the corresponding xRename method. The value
dvander@1203
  5007
** on the top of the stack is popped and passed as the zName argument
dvander@1203
  5008
** to the xRename method.
dvander@1203
  5009
*/
dvander@1203
  5010
case OP_VRename: {   /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  5011
  sqlite3_vtab *pVtab = (sqlite3_vtab *)(pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  5012
  assert( pVtab->pModule->xRename );
dvander@1203
  5013
dvander@1203
  5014
  Stringify(pTos, encoding);
dvander@1203
  5015
dvander@1203
  5016
  if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  5017
  sqlite3VtabLock(pVtab);
dvander@1203
  5018
  rc = pVtab->pModule->xRename(pVtab, pTos->z);
dvander@1203
  5019
  sqlite3VtabUnlock(db, pVtab);
dvander@1203
  5020
  if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  5021
dvander@1203
  5022
  popStack(&pTos, 1);
dvander@1203
  5023
  break;
dvander@1203
  5024
}
dvander@1203
  5025
#endif
dvander@1203
  5026
dvander@1203
  5027
#ifndef SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE
dvander@1203
  5028
/* Opcode: VUpdate P1 P2 P3
dvander@1203
  5029
**
dvander@1203
  5030
** P3 is a pointer to a virtual table object, an sqlite3_vtab structure.
dvander@1203
  5031
** This opcode invokes the corresponding xUpdate method. P2 values
dvander@1203
  5032
** are taken from the stack to pass to the xUpdate invocation. The
dvander@1203
  5033
** value on the top of the stack corresponds to the p2th element 
dvander@1203
  5034
** of the argv array passed to xUpdate.
dvander@1203
  5035
**
dvander@1203
  5036
** The xUpdate method will do a DELETE or an INSERT or both.
dvander@1203
  5037
** The argv[0] element (which corresponds to the P2-th element down
dvander@1203
  5038
** on the stack) is the rowid of a row to delete.  If argv[0] is
dvander@1203
  5039
** NULL then no deletion occurs.  The argv[1] element is the rowid
dvander@1203
  5040
** of the new row.  This can be NULL to have the virtual table
dvander@1203
  5041
** select the new rowid for itself.  The higher elements in the
dvander@1203
  5042
** stack are the values of columns in the new row.
dvander@1203
  5043
**
dvander@1203
  5044
** If P2==1 then no insert is performed.  argv[0] is the rowid of
dvander@1203
  5045
** a row to delete.
dvander@1203
  5046
**
dvander@1203
  5047
** P1 is a boolean flag. If it is set to true and the xUpdate call
dvander@1203
  5048
** is successful, then the value returned by sqlite3_last_insert_rowid() 
dvander@1203
  5049
** is set to the value of the rowid for the row just inserted.
dvander@1203
  5050
*/
dvander@1203
  5051
case OP_VUpdate: {   /* no-push */
dvander@1203
  5052
  sqlite3_vtab *pVtab = (sqlite3_vtab *)(pOp->p3);
dvander@1203
  5053
  sqlite3_module *pModule = (sqlite3_module *)pVtab->pModule;
dvander@1203
  5054
  int nArg = pOp->p2;
dvander@1203
  5055
  assert( pOp->p3type==P3_VTAB );
dvander@1203
  5056
  if( pModule->xUpdate==0 ){
dvander@1203
  5057
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "read-only table", 0);
dvander@1203
  5058
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  5059
  }else{
dvander@1203
  5060
    int i;
dvander@1203
  5061
    sqlite_int64 rowid;
dvander@1203
  5062
    Mem **apArg = p->apArg;
dvander@1203
  5063
    Mem *pX = &pTos[1-nArg];
dvander@1203
  5064
    for(i = 0; i<nArg; i++, pX++){
dvander@1203
  5065
      storeTypeInfo(pX, 0);
dvander@1203
  5066
      apArg[i] = pX;
dvander@1203
  5067
    }
dvander@1203
  5068
    if( sqlite3SafetyOff(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  5069
    sqlite3VtabLock(pVtab);
dvander@1203
  5070
    rc = pModule->xUpdate(pVtab, nArg, apArg, &rowid);
dvander@1203
  5071
    sqlite3VtabUnlock(db, pVtab);
dvander@1203
  5072
    if( sqlite3SafetyOn(db) ) goto abort_due_to_misuse;
dvander@1203
  5073
    if( pOp->p1 && rc==SQLITE_OK ){
dvander@1203
  5074
      assert( nArg>1 && apArg[0] && (apArg[0]->flags&MEM_Null) );
dvander@1203
  5075
      db->lastRowid = rowid;
dvander@1203
  5076
    }
dvander@1203
  5077
  }
dvander@1203
  5078
  popStack(&pTos, nArg);
dvander@1203
  5079
  break;
dvander@1203
  5080
}
dvander@1203
  5081
#endif /* SQLITE_OMIT_VIRTUALTABLE */
dvander@1203
  5082
dvander@1203
  5083
/* An other opcode is illegal...
dvander@1203
  5084
*/
dvander@1203
  5085
default: {
dvander@1203
  5086
  assert( 0 );
dvander@1203
  5087
  break;
dvander@1203
  5088
}
dvander@1203
  5089
dvander@1203
  5090
/*****************************************************************************
dvander@1203
  5091
** The cases of the switch statement above this line should all be indented
dvander@1203
  5092
** by 6 spaces.  But the left-most 6 spaces have been removed to improve the
dvander@1203
  5093
** readability.  From this point on down, the normal indentation rules are
dvander@1203
  5094
** restored.
dvander@1203
  5095
*****************************************************************************/
dvander@1203
  5096
    }
dvander@1203
  5097
dvander@1203
  5098
    /* Make sure the stack limit was not exceeded */
dvander@1203
  5099
    assert( pTos<=pStackLimit );
dvander@1203
  5100
dvander@1203
  5101
#ifdef VDBE_PROFILE
dvander@1203
  5102
    {
dvander@1203
  5103
      long long elapse = hwtime() - start;
dvander@1203
  5104
      pOp->cycles += elapse;
dvander@1203
  5105
      pOp->cnt++;
dvander@1203
  5106
#if 0
dvander@1203
  5107
        fprintf(stdout, "%10lld ", elapse);
dvander@1203
  5108
        sqlite3VdbePrintOp(stdout, origPc, &p->aOp[origPc]);
dvander@1203
  5109
#endif
dvander@1203
  5110
    }
dvander@1203
  5111
#endif
dvander@1203
  5112
dvander@1203
  5113
#ifdef SQLITE_TEST
dvander@1203
  5114
    /* Keep track of the size of the largest BLOB or STR that has appeared
dvander@1203
  5115
    ** on the top of the VDBE stack.
dvander@1203
  5116
    */
dvander@1203
  5117
    if( pTos>=p->aStack && (pTos->flags & (MEM_Blob|MEM_Str))!=0
dvander@1203
  5118
         && pTos->n>sqlite3_max_blobsize ){
dvander@1203
  5119
      sqlite3_max_blobsize = pTos->n;
dvander@1203
  5120
    }
dvander@1203
  5121
#endif
dvander@1203
  5122
dvander@1203
  5123
    /* The following code adds nothing to the actual functionality
dvander@1203
  5124
    ** of the program.  It is only here for testing and debugging.
dvander@1203
  5125
    ** On the other hand, it does burn CPU cycles every time through
dvander@1203
  5126
    ** the evaluator loop.  So we can leave it out when NDEBUG is defined.
dvander@1203
  5127
    */
dvander@1203
  5128
#ifndef NDEBUG
dvander@1203
  5129
    /* Sanity checking on the top element of the stack. If the previous
dvander@1203
  5130
    ** instruction was VNoChange, then the flags field of the top
dvander@1203
  5131
    ** of the stack is set to 0. This is technically invalid for a memory
dvander@1203
  5132
    ** cell, so avoid calling MemSanity() in this case.
dvander@1203
  5133
    */
dvander@1203
  5134
    if( pTos>=p->aStack && pTos->flags ){
dvander@1203
  5135
      sqlite3VdbeMemSanity(pTos);
dvander@1203
  5136
      assert( !sqlite3VdbeMemTooBig(pTos) );
dvander@1203
  5137
    }
dvander@1203
  5138
    assert( pc>=-1 && pc<p->nOp );
dvander@1203
  5139
dvander@1203
  5140
#ifdef SQLITE_DEBUG
dvander@1203
  5141
    /* Code for tracing the vdbe stack. */
dvander@1203
  5142
    if( p->trace && pTos>=p->aStack ){
dvander@1203
  5143
      int i;
dvander@1203
  5144
      fprintf(p->trace, "Stack:");
dvander@1203
  5145
      for(i=0; i>-5 && &pTos[i]>=p->aStack; i--){
dvander@1203
  5146
        if( pTos[i].flags & MEM_Null ){
dvander@1203
  5147
          fprintf(p->trace, " NULL");
dvander@1203
  5148
        }else if( (pTos[i].flags & (MEM_Int|MEM_Str))==(MEM_Int|MEM_Str) ){
dvander@1203
  5149
          fprintf(p->trace, " si:%lld", pTos[i].u.i);
dvander@1203
  5150
        }else if( pTos[i].flags & MEM_Int ){
dvander@1203
  5151
          fprintf(p->trace, " i:%lld", pTos[i].u.i);
dvander@1203
  5152
        }else if( pTos[i].flags & MEM_Real ){
dvander@1203
  5153
          fprintf(p->trace, " r:%g", pTos[i].r);
dvander@1203
  5154
        }else{
dvander@1203
  5155
          char zBuf[200];
dvander@1203
  5156
          sqlite3VdbeMemPrettyPrint(&pTos[i], zBuf);
dvander@1203
  5157
          fprintf(p->trace, " ");
dvander@1203
  5158
          fprintf(p->trace, "%s", zBuf);
dvander@1203
  5159
        }
dvander@1203
  5160
      }
dvander@1203
  5161
      if( rc!=0 ) fprintf(p->trace," rc=%d",rc);
dvander@1203
  5162
      fprintf(p->trace,"\n");
dvander@1203
  5163
    }
dvander@1203
  5164
#endif  /* SQLITE_DEBUG */
dvander@1203
  5165
#endif  /* NDEBUG */
dvander@1203
  5166
  }  /* The end of the for(;;) loop the loops through opcodes */
dvander@1203
  5167
dvander@1203
  5168
  /* If we reach this point, it means that execution is finished.
dvander@1203
  5169
  */
dvander@1203
  5170
vdbe_halt:
dvander@1203
  5171
  if( rc ){
dvander@1203
  5172
    p->rc = rc;
dvander@1203
  5173
    rc = SQLITE_ERROR;
dvander@1203
  5174
  }else{
dvander@1203
  5175
    rc = SQLITE_DONE;
dvander@1203
  5176
  }
dvander@1203
  5177
  sqlite3VdbeHalt(p);
dvander@1203
  5178
  p->pTos = pTos;
dvander@1203
  5179
  return rc;
dvander@1203
  5180
dvander@1203
  5181
  /* Jump to here if a string or blob larger than SQLITE_MAX_LENGTH
dvander@1203
  5182
  ** is encountered.
dvander@1203
  5183
  */
dvander@1203
  5184
too_big:
dvander@1203
  5185
  sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "string or blob too big", (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  5186
  rc = SQLITE_TOOBIG;
dvander@1203
  5187
  goto vdbe_halt;
dvander@1203
  5188
dvander@1203
  5189
  /* Jump to here if a malloc() fails.
dvander@1203
  5190
  */
dvander@1203
  5191
no_mem:
dvander@1203
  5192
  sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, "out of memory", (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  5193
  rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
dvander@1203
  5194
  goto vdbe_halt;
dvander@1203
  5195
dvander@1203
  5196
  /* Jump to here for an SQLITE_MISUSE error.
dvander@1203
  5197
  */
dvander@1203
  5198
abort_due_to_misuse:
dvander@1203
  5199
  rc = SQLITE_MISUSE;
dvander@1203
  5200
  /* Fall thru into abort_due_to_error */
dvander@1203
  5201
dvander@1203
  5202
  /* Jump to here for any other kind of fatal error.  The "rc" variable
dvander@1203
  5203
  ** should hold the error number.
dvander@1203
  5204
  */
dvander@1203
  5205
abort_due_to_error:
dvander@1203
  5206
  if( p->zErrMsg==0 ){
dvander@1203
  5207
    if( sqlite3MallocFailed() ) rc = SQLITE_NOMEM;
dvander@1203
  5208
    sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, sqlite3ErrStr(rc), (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  5209
  }
dvander@1203
  5210
  goto vdbe_halt;
dvander@1203
  5211
dvander@1203
  5212
  /* Jump to here if the sqlite3_interrupt() API sets the interrupt
dvander@1203
  5213
  ** flag.
dvander@1203
  5214
  */
dvander@1203
  5215
abort_due_to_interrupt:
dvander@1203
  5216
  assert( db->u1.isInterrupted );
dvander@1203
  5217
  if( db->magic!=SQLITE_MAGIC_BUSY ){
dvander@1203
  5218
    rc = SQLITE_MISUSE;
dvander@1203
  5219
  }else{
dvander@1203
  5220
    rc = SQLITE_INTERRUPT;
dvander@1203
  5221
  }
dvander@1203
  5222
  p->rc = rc;
dvander@1203
  5223
  sqlite3SetString(&p->zErrMsg, sqlite3ErrStr(rc), (char*)0);
dvander@1203
  5224
  goto vdbe_halt;
dvander@1203
  5225
}